JP2021107020A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the amusement.SOLUTION: In a game area PE, a lower operation port 305 into which a game ball can enter, an upper operation port 303 into which a game ball can enter, and an electric accessory 307 are provided. The electric accessory 307 can shift between an open state in which a game ball can be received in the upper operation port 303 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received in the upper operation port 303. The electric accessory 307 is configured such that a game ball can flow down in front of the electric accessory 307 when it is in the closed state. In a front face of an open/close member in the electric accessory 307, a guide part which defines a flow-down direction of a game ball as the downward.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a ball entry section where a game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the entry section, and a game ball cannot be accepted or accepted in the entry section. A variable receiving means capable of switching to a difficult second state is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

Here, there is still room for improvement in improving the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

The present invention
A launching means capable of launching a game ball into the gaming area based on a predetermined launch operation,
An entry portion provided in the game area where a game ball can enter, and a ball entry portion.
A first state provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means that can be switched,
A variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition.
With
The variable receiving means is configured so that the game ball can flow down in front of the variable receiving means when it is in the second state.
It is characterized in that it includes a defining means capable of defining the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. A perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. A perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. The front view which shows the structure of the game board. Front view of the winning unit. A perspective view of the winning unit viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. (A) is a front view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball in the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a front view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball in the open state of the electric accessory. (A) is a cross-sectional view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball in the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball in the open state of the electric accessory. The front view which shows the light emitting substrate. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. Explanatory drawing for explaining contents of various counters used for winning or failing lottery. Explanatory drawing for explaining the pass / fail table. Explanatory drawing for explaining the type table. Opening type table and general drawing Explanatory drawing for explaining the opening pattern. The flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing a winning process for thru. The flowchart which shows the normal processing in MPU of a main control unit. A flowchart showing a game time control process. A flowchart showing a data setting process. A flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. A flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the opening / closing process of the winning opening. A flowchart showing a process for electric service support. Flow chart showing the normal game time control process. Flow chart showing the normal map fluctuation start processing. Flow chart showing the game state transition process. A flowchart showing the opening / closing process of the accessory. A flowchart showing the setting process for each round. A block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing various effects. A block diagram for explaining a storage area for holding. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing in MPU of an effect control device. A flowchart showing a process for starting a special figure fluctuation. The flowchart which shows the general drawing variation display control processing in MPU of an effect control device. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the Fuzu game round, and (b) A flowchart showing a process for starting the Fuzu fluctuation. Explanatory drawing for explaining the special light emission effect. A flowchart showing processing during fluctuations in the normal map. The flowchart which shows the support state processing in MPU of an effect control device. Explanatory drawing for explaining special display effect. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of a game. The front view which shows the winning unit of the 2nd Embodiment. A perspective view of the winning unit viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 42. (A) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the open state of the electric accessory. (A) is a front view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball in the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a front view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball in the open state of the electric accessory. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a second guide portion in a modified example of the second embodiment, and is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the CC line cross section of FIG. 42. The front view which shows the winning unit of 3rd Embodiment. A perspective view of the winning unit viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the open state of the electric accessory. The front view which shows the winning unit of 4th Embodiment. A perspective view of the winning unit viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the open state of the electric accessory. (A) is a front view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball in the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a front view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball in the open state of the electric accessory. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the general drawing opening pattern of 5th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the normal figure game state transition processing in MPU of a main control device. A flowchart showing the opening / closing process of the accessory. A flowchart showing the setting process for each round. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of a game. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the special display effect of 6th Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal map opening pattern, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the normal map opening pattern and the special display effect. The flowchart which shows the processing in the support state in MPU of an effect control device. A flowchart showing processing during the waiting period. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of a game. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of a game. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of a game.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates and the like on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And also has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a winning unit 301, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, a character display unit 44, and the like. Further, the winning unit 301 is provided with an upper operating port 303 and a lower operating port 305. In the present embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to win the upper operating port 303 than to win the lower operating port 305.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303, and the lower operating port 305, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 24. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out. Is executed, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 305, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the upper operating port 303, four game balls are paid out. Is executed.

The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to enhance the advantage of the upper operating port 303 over the lower operating port 305, it is preferable to set a larger number of payouts related to the upper operating port 303 than the number of payouts related to the lower operating port 305. On the contrary, from the viewpoint of only enhancing the advantage of the support state described later, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 305 to be larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 303. Further, in order to enhance the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to the operating ports 303 and 305, it is preferable to set a larger number of payouts related to the variable winning device 32 than the number of payouts related to the respective operating ports 303 and 305.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303, the lower operating port 305, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PE can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PE, the upper region PE1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PE1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and the variable display unit 36. The left region PE2, which is the left region, the right region PE3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PE1, and the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided into a lower region PE4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the launch handle 54 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball flows down to the left of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PE1. Start out. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper region PE1 → left side region PE2 → lower region PE4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch handle 54 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the player can play the game on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PE1. The ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the right region PE3 → the lower region PE4. That is, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 54, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2 of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, and the right side region PE3. The game can be played so that the game ball flows down.

The upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 303 faces upward. The upper working port 303 is opened forward, and the lower working port 305 is opened upward. The game ball can reach the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 regardless of which of the first firing operation and the second firing operation is performed by the player. The upper operating port 303 is provided with an electric accessory 307 that opens and closes the upper operating port 303. The electric accessory 307 is in a closed state (non-accepted state, non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the game ball cannot win in the upper operating port 303, and an open state (accepted state, in which the game ball can win more than in the closed state). It can be switched to the support state or the guide state). The upper operating port 303, the electric accessory 307, and the lower operating port 305 are mounted on the winning unit 301, are integrated into one unit as the operating port device, and are installed in the lower region PE4 of the game board 24. The details of the winning unit 301 will be described later.

The variable winning device 32 is installed in the lower region PE4 on the game board 24. That is, the game ball can reach the variable winning device 32 regardless of whether the player is performing the first firing operation or the second firing operation. The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and the game ball is likely to win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit or a special loss is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened up to a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) as one round. There is an aspect to be done.

Two through gates 35 are provided on the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3 on the game board 24 with the variable display unit 36 interposed therebetween. That is, when the player is performing the first launch operation, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 on the side provided in the left region PE2, and the player performs the second launch operation. If so, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 on the side provided in the right region PE3. Both through gates 35 are configured to allow game balls to pass through, and the game balls that have won the through gate 35 in the game area PE are discharged to the game area PE as they are. Then, the game ball that has won (passed through) the through gate 35 then flows down to the lower region PE4. That is, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the upper operating port 303, the lower operating port 305, and the variable winning device 32. When a prize is won in the through gate 35, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends forward from the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. A part of the above-mentioned general winning opening 31 is installed on the front surface of the decorative member 39 in a state of being opened upward.

When the variable winning device 32 is in the open / close execution mode (or in the open / close execution mode) due to the jackpot winning, the main display unit 43 has the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode. The round display unit RS for clearly indicating the number of times the is opened, the first result display unit AS for clarifying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 305, and the upper operating port 303. A second result display unit BS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the prize is set.

The round display unit RS starts displaying the number of times of opening when the opening / closing execution mode starts, and ends the display when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

In the first result display unit AS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 305, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 305 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 305 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit AS and the variable display is displayed. After stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In addition, a pattern that is variablely displayed when a prize is won in the lower operating port 305 may be referred to as a first special symbol or a first special symbol.

In the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 303, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and the variation is displayed. After the is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In addition, it may be referred to as a second special symbol or a second special symbol that is variablely displayed when the ball enters the upper operating port 303.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 305 and 303, the variation display is started on the corresponding result display units AS and BS, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. It corresponds to one game. However, one game is not limited to the above contents, and for example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any of the operating ports 305 and 303 is awarded, the single result display unit is provided. In the configuration in which the variation display is performed on the result display unit of the above, the variation display is started on the single result display unit, and the game is played until the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed. It will be once.

The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 performs a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in the through gate 35. The result of is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 307 provided in the lower operating port 305 is in the open state in a predetermined mode. It should be noted that a pattern that is variablely displayed when a prize is won in the through gate 35 may be referred to as a normal pattern or a normal pattern.

Here, based on the winning of the through gate 35, the variable display is started on the accessory display unit 44, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variable display is stopped until the accessory display unit 44 is stopped. Corresponds to one game in. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish from the game times in the result display units AS and BS, the game times in the accessory display unit 44 are also referred to as normal figure game times, and the games in the main display unit 43 (result display units AS and BS). The times are also called special figure game times (first special figure game times, second special figure game times).

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device can be used. May be good.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of the symbol. Further, in the variable display unit 36, a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is not deteriorated due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 305. That is, when the first result display unit AS performs the variable display, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display, and when the second result display unit BS performs the variable display, it is displayed. At the same time, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 presets the opening / closing execution mode for the game to shift to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the variable display of the special figure game times corresponding to the result display units AS and BS, but also the variable display of the normal figure game times corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is performed. Then, the position and size of the variable display area on the display screen, the variable symbol, etc. are set differently between the special figure game times and the normal figure game times, and the variable display of the special figure game times and the normal figure game The fluctuation display of the times can be visually distinguished from each other. The areas where the special figure game times and the normal figure game times are performed will be described in detail later.

A first reserved light emitting unit 45 corresponding to the first result display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 305 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first reserved light emitting unit 45. Further, a second reserved light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 303 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second reserved light emitting unit 46. As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first reserved light emitting unit 45 and the second reserved light emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the falling of the game ball. ing.

At the lower part of the center frame 42, a third holding light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the third holding light emitting unit 47.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is formed by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and the game is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and the game ball is launched by operating the launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. The operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel 62 may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various light emitting units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through the passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 83 made of the above. The substrate box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut off when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling treatment.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box connecting portion 85, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed so that it cannot be opened and is connected to the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box joint 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint 85 Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of the opening of the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling pieces 86 and the coupling pieces 87 form a substrate box 83 and a mounting base. The joining process is performed between them.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in 84 and is configured.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92 and a control device collecting unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the amusement park are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal when the number of game balls is insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. An output terminal for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state) is provided. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The control device collective unit 93 includes a payout control device 97, a power supply, and a launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply and a launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and is further produced by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the launch handle 54. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<About winning unit 301>
Next, the winning unit 301 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. 5 is a front view of the winning unit 301, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the winning unit 301 viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the flow-down state of the game ball, and FIG. 10 is a front view showing a light emitting substrate.

As shown in FIG. 5, the game board 24 has a pair of left and right first and second game nails (so-called navel nails) 281 provided at the same height position below the variable display unit 36 (see FIG. 4). , 282, and third and fourth game nails (so-called jump nails) 283,284 provided on the left and right sides of the first and second game nails 281,282 are arranged. The winning units 301 are arranged so as to be located below the first to fourth game nails 281 to 284.

A first light emitting unit 311 is provided in the upper part of the winning unit 301, an upper winning part 313 is provided in the central part, and a lower winning part 315 is provided in the lower part. Further, second light emitting units 317 are provided on both left and right sides of the winning unit 301. The first light emitting unit 311, the upper winning unit 313, the lower winning unit 315, and the second light emitting unit 317 are provided with respect to the base body 320.

The base body 320 is made of a synthetic resin such as ABS resin. The base body 320 is made opaque by being formed of an opaque member or having a metal plating treatment on the surface thereof. The base body 320 includes a plate-shaped base portion 321 that has a plate shape, and a portion of the base body 320 that protrudes in the thickness direction is integrally formed with the plate-shaped base portion 321. As shown in FIG. 7, the front surface 321a of the plate-shaped base portion 321 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L1 from the window panel 62 is larger than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball can flow down in front of the plate-shaped base portion 321.

Here, the winning unit 301 has a configuration as an operating port device by the upper winning section 313 and a lower winning section 315, a configuration as an illumination device by the first and second light emitting units 311, 317, and a first light emitting unit 311. It also has a configuration as a guide device for a game ball by the upper winning unit 313. Hereinafter, each configuration will be described in order.

<Regarding the configuration of the upper winning unit 313 and the lower winning unit 315 as an operating port device>
As shown in FIG. 5, the upper winning portion 313 includes an upper operating port 303 and an opening / closing member 331 as an electric accessory 307 that opens / closes the upper operating port 303.

The upper operating port 303 has a front opening and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape. The opening / closing member 331 is arranged so as to cover the operating port 303 from the front (see FIG. 7). The opening / closing member 331 is formed in a plate shape, and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The left-right width (dimension in the longitudinal direction) of the opening / closing member 331 is set to be about the same as the distance between the third game nail 283 and the fourth game nail 284, in other words, for about three game balls. It is set to the length. On the other hand, the vertical width (dimension in the lateral direction) of the opening / closing member 331 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The upper operating port 303 and the opening / closing member 331 are located below the first to fourth game nails 281 to 284. Specifically, one of the left and right ends of the opening / closing member 331 is located directly below the third game nail 283, and the other is located directly below the fourth game nail 284.

The opening / closing member 331 is held in a state of being rotatable in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the game board 24) by the base body 320. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the lower end portion 331a of the opening / closing member 331 is rotatably supported by the lower end portion 331a, and is rotatable around the lower end portion 331a. Then, by rotating back and forth around the lower end portion 331a, the game board 24 (plate-shaped base portion 321) is suppressed from protruding from the front surface, and the closed position (second position) that covers the upper operating port 303 and the game board. The 24 (plate-shaped base portion 321) can be displaced to an open position (first position) that protrudes forward from the front surface 321a and opens the upper operating port 303.

The front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331 is substantially flush with the front surface 321a of the plate-shaped base portion 321 in the closed position (standing posture) so that a step is not generated as much as possible between the opening / closing member 331 and the plate-shaped base portion 321. It is configured. As a result, not only the game ball can pass in front of the opening / closing member 331, but also the game ball is suppressed from being caught at the boundary between the plate-shaped base portion 321 and the opening / closing member 331, so that the game ball flows smoothly. Is secured.

As shown in FIG. 6, an electric accessory driving unit 332 that drives the opening / closing member 331 is attached to the back surface side of the base body 320. The electric accessory driving unit 332 has a solenoid as a driving source and a link mechanism as a driving force transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the solenoid to the opening / closing member 331. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 81. When the solenoid is driven, the opening / closing member 331 rotates from the closed position to the open position, and switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the opening / closing member 331 is rotated from the open position to the closed position by the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like), and the open state is switched to the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 7, the base body 320 is formed with an upper guide passage 333 that guides the game ball that has entered the upper operating port 303 to the back side of the game board 24. The upper guide passage 333 extends rearward, and the game ball that has reached the upper guide passage 333 is guided backward along the bottom surface 333a of the passage. At an intermediate position, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper operating port 303 is arranged. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and when the game ball passes through the detection area of the detection sensor, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81. There is. The main control device 81 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the upper operating port 303 based on this detection information.

As shown in FIG. 5, the lower winning portion 315 includes a lower operating port case 337, and the lower operating port case 337 opens upward to form the lower operating port 305. The lower operating port case 337 is arranged in the vicinity of the opening / closing member 331 below the upper winning portion 313. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower working port case 337 projects forward from the front surface 321a of the plate-shaped base portion 321. The left-right width (that is, the left-right width of the lower working opening 305) and the front-rear width (that is, the front-back width of the lower working opening 305) on the upper side of the lower working opening case 337 are slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball. Can win a prize in the lower operating port 305 one by one.

As shown in FIG. 5, the lower actuating opening case 337 is located below the first and second game nails 281,282. Specifically, one of the left and right ends of the lower operating port case 337 (lower operating port 305) is located directly below the first game nail 281 and the other is located directly below the second game nail 282.

As shown in FIG. 7, the base body 320 is formed with a lower guide passage 339 that guides the game ball that has entered the lower operating port 305 to the back side of the game board 24. The lower guide passage 339 extends rearward, and the game ball that has reached the lower guide passage 339 is guided backward along the bottom surface 339a of the passage. At an intermediate position, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower operating port 305 is arranged. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and when the game ball passes through the detection area of the detection sensor, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81. There is. The main control device 81 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the lower operating port 305 based on this detection information.

In the above configuration, the game ball that has passed between the first and second game nails 281,282 flows down the first flow path R1 toward the lower operation port 305, as shown in FIG. 8A. When the opening / closing member 331 is vertically arranged so as to be located above the lower operating port 305 and the opening / closing member 331 is in the closed state, the opening / closing member 331 is transmitted from the first flow path R1. By retracting (see FIG. 9A), the game ball passes in front of the opening / closing member 331 and can win a prize in the lower operating port 305.

Further, the game ball passing between the first and third game nails 281,283 and the game ball passing between the second and fourth game nails 282 and 284 are the second and third flow paths R2, respectively. , R3 flows down. However, these game balls pass through the side of the lower operating port case 337 and reach the out opening 37 (see FIG. 5) without winning a prize in the lower operating port 305.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (b) and 9 (b), when the opening / closing member 331 rotates (tilts) forward from the closed position and is displaced to the open position, the game ball can be received into the upper operating port 303. Region RA is formed on the first flow path R1. That is, at the same time when the upper operating port 303 is opened, the opening / closing member 331 intersects the first flow path R1 (the opening / closing member 331 is located on the first flow path R1). In this case, the opening / closing member 331 receives the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 on the back surface 331c and guides it to the upper operating port 303. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 wins a prize in the upper operating port 303 before reaching the lower operating port 305.

Further, since the receiving region RA is also formed on the second and third flow paths R2 and R3, the game ball flowing down the second and third flow paths R2 and R3 also wins the upper operating port 303. That is, not only the first flow-down path R1 but also the game balls flowing down on both the left and right sides of the first flow-down path R1 can win a prize in the upper operating port 303.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 331 is located above the lower operating port 305 and both are arranged adjacent to each other, the opening / closing member 331 is switched to the open state as shown in FIG. 9B. At the same time as opening the upper operating port 303, the opening / closing member 331 closes the lower operating port 305. Specifically, the opening / closing member 331 displaced to the open position covers the lower operating port 305 from above. As a result, the game aiming at winning the lower operating port 305 and the game aiming at winning the upper operating port 303 can be clearly separated from the player's point of view. As a result, when the opening / closing member 331 is switched to the open state, the player is prevented from being distracted by the lower operating port 305, and the electric accessory 307 and the upper operating port 303 can be effectively focused on. It will be possible.

<About the configuration of the first and second light emitting units 311,317 as an illumination device>
As shown in FIG. 5, the first light emitting unit 311 is provided with a light transmitting unit 341 having light transmission. The light transmitting portion 341 is arranged in the vicinity of the opening / closing member 331 above the upper winning portion 313. The translucent portion 341 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The left-right width of the light-transmitting portion 341 is set to be about the same as the left-right width of the opening / closing member 331, in other words, the length is set to the length of about three game balls. The vertical width of the translucent portion 341 is the size of about two game balls.

As shown in FIG. 7, the front surface 341a of the translucent portion 341 is substantially flush with the front surface 321a of the plate-shaped base portion 321. That is, the distance L2 from the window panel 62 is larger than that of one game ball. Therefore, each game ball flowing down the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 can flow down in front of the light transmitting portion 341. The front surface 341a of the light transmitting portion 341 is formed flat in order to suppress the flow of the game ball on the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 from being disturbed.

The entire front surface 341a does not have to be flat, and at least the region overlapping the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 may be flat. Further, the light transmitting portion 341 does not necessarily have to be formed of a single member, and a plurality of light transmitting members may be laminated in the front-rear direction to form the light transmitting portion 341. In this case, it is preferable that the front surface of the foremost translucent member is flat.

As shown in FIG. 6, the second light emitting portion 317 is provided with a protruding portion 347 protruding forward from the front surface 321a of the plate-shaped base portion 321. Each protrusion 347 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Each protruding portion 347 is arranged in the vicinity of the translucent portion 341 on both the left and right sides of the translucent portion 341, and extends linearly in the vertical direction so as to straddle the translucent portion 341 and the upper winning portion 313. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, each protrusion 347 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view, and the amount of protrusion (front-back width) is larger than that of one game ball. The front surface 347a of each protrusion 347 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L3 from the window panel 62 is smaller than that of one game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 10, behind the light transmitting portion 341 and the protruding portion 347, a light diffusing plate 357 (light guide plate) and a plurality of light emitting bodies 360 (specifically, LEDs) are mounted on a light emitting substrate 359. And are arranged.

The light diffusion plate 357 is a transparent synthetic resin material whose surface is subjected to a matte finish (ground glass finish) or an uneven finish. By providing the light diffusion plate 357, the light that has passed through the translucent portion 341 and the projecting portion 347 is dispersed in multiple directions, and the opposite side is not clearly visible. That is, the light diffusing plate 357 diffuses the light from the light emitting body 360, and also plays a role of making the light emitting substrate 359 and the light emitting body 360 invisible or invisible behind the light emitting body 360 when visually recognized from the front. There is.

The light emitting substrate 359 is arranged so that the mounting surface of the light emitting body 360 faces the front of the gaming machine. Each light emitting body 360 is arranged so as to be located behind the light transmitting portion 341 and the protruding portion 347, and is arranged so that the light emitting surface faces forward. The light emitted from each light emitting body 360 is diffused by the light diffusing plate 357 and then incident on each of the light transmitting portion 341 and the protruding portion 347. As shown in FIG. 7, the back surface 341b of the translucent portion 341 and the back surface of the projecting portion 347 are subjected to a predetermined cut process for light diffusion to form irregularities. Therefore, the light incident on the translucent portion 341 and the projecting portion 347 is further diffused by the unevenness, and then passes through the translucent portion 341 and the projecting portion 347 and is irradiated forward. As a result, the entire area of the translucent portion 341 and the protruding portion 347 can be visually recognized as emitting light.

When the translucent portion 341 is composed of a laminated structure of a plurality of translucent members, the unevenness may be formed on the back surface of the foremost translucent member, or the second and subsequent translucent members from the front. It may be formed on the front surface or the back surface of the optical member.

The light emitting substrate 359 is electrically connected to the effect control device 82. By performing the light emission control according to the game situation by the effect control device 82, the light emission effect corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the opening / closing member 331 is executed. The details of the light emission effect will be described later.

<About the configuration as a guide device by the first light emitting unit 311 and the upper winning unit 313>
As shown in FIG. 6, the front surface 341a of the translucent portion 341 is provided with two first guide portions 365 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down in front of the translucent portion 341. Each first guide portion 365 projects forward from the front surface 341a of the translucent portion 341 and has a plate shape. These first guide portions 365 are integrally formed with the light transmitting portion 341, and have light transmission like the light transmitting portion 341.

Each of the first guide portions 365 has the same length and extends vertically, and specifically, extends linearly from the upper end to the lower end of the translucent portion 341. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, each of the first guide portions 365 has a vertically long substantially rectangular shape in a side view, and the amount of protrusion (front-back width) thereof is larger than that of one game ball. .. The front surface 365a of each first guide portion 365 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L4 from the window panel 62 is smaller than that of one game ball.

As shown in FIG. 8, these first guide portions 365 are arranged in parallel at intervals through which one game ball can pass, and each of them is located directly below each game nail 281,282. As shown in FIG. 7, the distance L5 between the upper surface 365b of each first guide portion 365 and each game nail 281,282 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, only the game ball that has passed between the first and second game nails 281,282 can pass through the first flow path R1.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331 of the upper winning portion 313 is provided with two second guide portions 371 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing member 331. .. Each second guide portion 371 projects forward from the front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331 and has a plate shape. These second guide portions 371 are integrally formed with the opening / closing member 331.

Each of the second guide portions 371 extends vertically with the same length, and specifically, extends linearly from the upper end of the opening / closing member 331 to an intermediate position thereof. The second guide portions 371 are arranged so as to be continuous with each of the first guide portions 365. Specifically, the second guide portion 371 and the first guide portion 365 are arranged so that the central axes in the left-right direction coincide with each other, and both are arranged in a straight line in a front view. The thickness (width) of each second guide portion 371 is substantially the same as that of each first guide portion 365.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 8, the game balls that have passed between the first and second game nails 281,282 are defined in the downward flow direction at each of the first and second guide portions 365 and 371. NS. Then, when the opening / closing member 331 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 8A, the game ball is guided to the lower operating port 305 by both the first and second guide portions 365 and 371. .. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 331 is switched to the open state, as shown in FIG. 8B, the game ball is guided to the back surface 331c (ball receiving surface) of the opening / closing member 331 by the first guide portion 365. NS.

In this way, by guiding the game ball after passing through the first to fourth game nails 281 to 284 by the first guide portion 365 and the second guide portion 371, the game is played in front of the translucent portion 341 and the opening / closing member 331. The ball is suppressed from rampaging. As a result, it is possible to prevent the probability of winning the lower operating port 305 and the upper operating port 303 from being excessively lowered, and to reassure the player. At the same time, it is also possible to prevent the visibility of the light emitting effect in the translucent portion 341 from being lowered due to the influence of the game ball flowing down in front of the translucent portion 341. In addition, since the guide paths of the game balls are clearly indicated by the first and second guide units 365 and 371, it is easy for the player to win the game balls in the lower operating port 305 and the upper operating port 303 (in appearance). It can give an impression (easy to be guided), and it also leads to improvement of motivation to play.

By the way, since the protruding portion 347 of the second light emitting portion 317 is erected, between the first game nail 281 and the third game nail 283, and between the second game nail 282 and the fourth game nail 284. Each game ball that has passed through is also guided to the upper operating port 303. Further, the presence of the protrusion 347 suppresses the entry of the game ball from the side into the first to third flow paths R1 to R3. As a result, another game ball may collide with the game ball on the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 from the side, and the game ball may be repelled to the outside of the upper operation port 303 or the lower operation port 305. It is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 7, each second guide portion 371 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view, and the amount of protrusion (front-rear width) thereof is suppressed to be smaller than that of each first guide portion 365. There is. Where each second guide portion 371 is displaced as the opening / closing member 331 rotates, by suppressing the amount of protrusion of each second guide portion 371 to be small, collision of each second guide portion 371 with the window panel 62 is avoided. Has been done. As a result, damage to the second guide portion 371 and the window panel 62 due to the displacement of the opening / closing member 331 is suppressed. In order to avoid a collision with the window panel 62, the amount of protrusion of each second guide portion 371 has a balance with the height position of each second guide portion 371 with respect to the opening / closing member 331, the rotation angle of the opening / closing member 331, and the like. However, from the viewpoint of guiding the game ball, it is preferable that the radius is equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball.

The distance L6 between the upper surface 371a (upper end portion) of the second guide portion 371 and the lower surface 365c (lower end portion) of the first guide portion 365 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, it is suppressed that the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 moves to the other flow paths R2 and R3 side through between the first guide unit 365 and the second guide unit 371. As a result, the game ball on the first flow path R1 can be appropriately guided to the lower operating port 305.

Further, since the distance L6 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the first guide portion 365 functions as a suppressing means for suppressing the collision of the game ball from above with respect to the upper surface 371a of the second guide portion 371. be able to. The opening / closing member 331 is configured to open the upper operating port 303 by rotating forward from the closed position (standing posture), and when the game ball collides with the upper surface 371a of the second guide portion 371 from above, There is a concern that the opening / closing member 331 will rotate forward due to the impact, and the upper operating port 303 will be opened regardless of the switching control. In this case, contrary to the game design, there is a possibility that the game ball wins the upper operating port 303, and the game hole may suffer a loss. In this regard, when the first guide portion 365 functions as a suppressing means, the unexpected opening of the opening / closing member 331 can be suppressed, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably eliminated.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the amount of protrusion of the second guide portion 371 is smaller than that of the first guide portion 365, the first guide portion 365 covers the entire upper surface of the second guide portion 371 from above. The mode is to cover, and the collision of the game ball from above is further suppressed. From the viewpoint of functioning as a suppressing means, the thickness (width) of the first guide portion 365 may be larger than that of the second guide portion 371.

As shown in FIG. 7, the distance L7 between the lower surface 371b (lower end portion) of the second guide portion 371 and the lower operating port 305 (upper end portion of the lower operating port case 337) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. .. With this configuration, the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 moves laterally through between the second guide portion 371 and the lower operating port 305, and can deviate from the first flow path R1. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball passing between the first and second game nails 281,282 always wins the lower operating port 305, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed, or between the game nails 281,282. It is possible to maintain the player's interest in the whereabouts of the game ball that has passed through.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A certain RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211, and the like provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. In this case, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of various detection sensors 211, it is provided in a winning ball entry section (payout compatible ball entry section) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 303, a lower operating port 305, and a through gate 35. The plurality of detection sensors are connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 202, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305, and the support generating lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when a prize is specified for the lower operating port 305, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output to the upper operating port 303. When the prize is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

The effect control device 82 is provided with effect commands for various special figures such as a variable command, a type command, a variable end command, an opening command, and an ending command related to the special figure game times, and a variable command and a type command related to the normal figure game times. , Fluctuation end command, opening command, ending command, and other production commands for ordinary drawings are output. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 332 that opens and closes the electric accessory 307 of the upper operating port 303, and a main display unit. 43 and the display unit 44 for the accessory are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory 307 is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 332 is executed in the MPU 202 so that the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed. Further, in each special figure game, the display control of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main display unit 32 is in the open / close execution mode. The display control of the round display unit RS on the display unit 43 is executed. Then, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MOU 202 during the normal game game, and the support state is executed by the accessory display unit 44 in the support state in which the electric accessory 307 is won in the open state. Display control indicating winning is executed.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202, and through this external output terminal 99, the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side is provided with ball entry information and a jackpot to various entry sections. Information about the lottery result such as is output. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

Based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the effect control device 82 includes the reserved light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display light emitting unit 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and the winning unit. It drives and controls the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the 301, and also controls the display control device 212.

The display control device 212 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the effect control device 82. In this case, the effect control device 82 determines the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 81. Execute a lottery for the presence or absence of reach and the content of the reach effect.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 12A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, there are three symbols, upper, middle, and lower, in a substantially central portion of the display screen G as an area for variable display of the special figure game times. Columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result, or the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols are combined. Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. NS.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate.

The first reserved display area Ga corresponding to the first reserved light emitting unit 45 is set on the left side at the lower part of the display screen G, and corresponds to the second reserved light emitting unit 46 on the right side at the lower part of the display screen G. The second hold display area Gb is set.

In the first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operating port 305 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is displayed as a partition. Specifically, when the game ball wins the lower operating port 305, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the first holding display area Ga includes the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the second. The unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins the lower operating port 305, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is placed in the lower operating port 305. When the number of reserved images is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4.

Further, in the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operating port 303 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is displayed in a section so that it can be displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper operating port 303, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the second holding display area Gb includes the first unit holding display areas Gb1 and the second. The unit hold display area Gb2, the third unit hold display area Gb3, and the fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins the upper operating port 303 is 1, the holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the upper operating opening 303. When the number of reserved images is 4, the reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Gb1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Gb4.

Areas that do not overlap with the above-mentioned symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the hold display areas Ga and Gb on the display screen G, more specifically, the upper part of the display screen G is a normal figure display area as a variable display area of the normal figure game times. P is set. The normal figure display area P is composed of a plurality of (two) display units, and variable display is possible by switching the display color in each of these display units. Further, the normal symbol display area P is smaller than the variable display area in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and each display unit in the normal symbol display area P is smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

The normal map display area P corresponds to the accessory display unit 44, and when the accessory display unit 44 performs the variable display, the normal map display area P also performs the variable display. Then, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 together with the accessory display unit 44.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a lottery for generating jackpots, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the first result display unit AS of the main display unit 43. The second result display unit BS and the fluctuation type counter CS for determining the fluctuation display time of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 are used. Further, when determining the opening random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 307 of the upper operating port 303 is set to the electric service open state, and the opening type in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 is set. It is decided to use the open type counter C5 to be used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, C4 to C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is obtained when a prize is generated in the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as the acquired information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first result display unit and a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and a first execution area AE1. The holding areas Ra and Rb include a first area Ra1, Rb1, a second area Ra2, Rb2, a third area Ra3, Rb3, and a fourth area Ra4, Rb4, respectively, and the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303. Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is set as pending information in any area according to the winning history. Stored in. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area Ra1, Rb1 to the fourth areas Ra4, Rb4, when the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area Ra1, Rb1 → the first Numerical information is stored in the order of 2 areas Ra2, Rb2 → 3rd area Ra3, Rb3 → 4th area Ra4, Rb4 in chronological order. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303 can be reserved and stored. Further, a total reserved number storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 232, and the number of winning histories stored in the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303 is specified in the total reserved number storage area. Information to do is stored.

The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the hold areas Ra and Rb when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started. At the start of the game round, a winning / failing determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reaches the maximum value (that is, 599), and then returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 305, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 303. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, as the hit / miss table for the special figure, the hit / miss table for the special figure (the hit / miss information group for the low probability) for the low probability mode of FIG. 14 (a) and the high probability of the high probability of FIG. 14 (b). A special figure pass / fail table for the mode (high probability pass / fail information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the special figure, as shown in FIG. 14A, the value of the random number for winning the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the value of the random number that wins the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is usually out of order except for the value of the random number that is the big hit.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are subject to two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 307 of the upper operating port 303 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By providing a difference, a plurality of jackpot results are set.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 307 of the upper operating port 303, the electric accessory 307 of the upper operating port 303 is compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PE. Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening is relatively high or low per unit time. ) And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the open random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened when the electric accessory is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time is set. It has been set for a long time. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 307 is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 307 is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is set is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode. Has been done.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the upper operating port 303 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operating port 305 is higher than that of the upper operating port 303, but in the high frequency support mode, the upper operating port 303 is more likely than the lower operating port 305. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the upper operating port 303, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one condition or any combination of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 305, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 303. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a type table (distribution information group) in the type table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203.

In the present embodiment, a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results. The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the type table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 15A, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result. Therefore, "40 to 89" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

On the other hand, in the type table for the second result display unit, as shown in FIG. 15B, only the 6R normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations of the game results. Among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "40 to 99" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the distribution mode of the game result when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the prize in the upper operating port 303 and the winning in the lower operating port 305. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on.

Here, in either the type table for the first result display unit or the type table for the second result display unit, the probability that the probability variation jackpot result will be the same when the jackpot is won is the same. That is, in the type table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 60. Further, in the type table for the second result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 60. Therefore, the probability that the winning / failing lottery mode will be in the high probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is that the jackpot is won based on the winning of the lower operating port 305 and the jackpot is won based on the winning of the upper operating port 303. It is the same as the case where (specifically, 60%).

However, if the jackpot is won based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 and the probability variation jackpot result occurs, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is always obtained, whereas the jackpot is won based on the winning of the lower operating port 305. In the case of a probability variation jackpot result, there is a 50% probability that a 6R probability variation jackpot result will be obtained, and a 10% probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot result will be obtained. That is, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the upper operating port 303. It will be higher than if you win a big hit based on the prize.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player between the lower operating port 305 and the upper operating port 303. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that the upper operating port 303 will be won among the lower operating port 305 and the upper operating port 303, and accordingly, the winning frequency of the upper operating port 303 will be increased. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode increases.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 305, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 303. It is stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the special figure game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the special figure game times, the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result. In the gaming machine, the stop display result is displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur before the derivation display is performed.

In other words, a combination of reach symbols may be established by stopping and displaying some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to end the variable display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

To specifically explain the display contents of FIG. 12, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed. After that, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends. In this case, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, when the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display and the open / close execution mode is generated, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. Be done. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 305, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 303. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 is stored in the electric service holding area 233 as the acquisition information storage means on the normal drawing side when the through gate 35 is won. Stored.

The electric service holding area 233 includes an electric service holding area Rc and a second execution area AE2 for a general drawing. The holding area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 according to the winning history of the through gate 35. Each numerical information of the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 is stored as hold information in any area.

In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area Rc1 → the second area Rc2 → the third area Rc3 → the fourth area. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of Rc4. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored.

The second execution area AE2 for the normal drawing is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the hold area Rc when the variable display of the accessory display unit 44 is started. At the start of the Fuzu game round, an opening determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

More specifically, the open random number counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 199, the maximum value (that is, 199) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a general drawing lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 307 is controlled to the open state by the value of the stored open random number counter C4.

The value of the random number that wins the support state in the normal drawing lottery is stored in the winning / failing table storage area 221 as the winning / failing information group storage means in the ROM 203 as the winning / failing table for the normal drawing. As already explained, in the general map lottery, the probability of being in the support state (probability of winning the support state) is the same regardless of the level of the support mode, and the pass / fail table for the general map stored in ROM 203 is also available. You are using a common table. For example, as shown in FIG. 14C, if the open random number counter C4 = 0 to 99, the electric accessory 307 is shifted to the support state for controlling the open state, and C4 = 100. If it is ~ 199, the electric accessory 307 is set not to shift to the support state without being controlled to the open state.

Here, as an mode of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the support state, the frequency of winning a prize in the electric accessory 307 from the start to the end of the support state is relatively high or low. High prize support status and low prize support status are set. Further, two types of high prize support states, a first high prize support state and a second high prize support state, are set.

Specifically, in the first high winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening is performed until 3 sec elapses or the electric accessory 307 (above). It is continued until the number of winnings in the operating port 303) reaches five. Further, in the second high prize support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the support state, and one opening is performed until 2 sec elapses or the electric accessory 307 (upper operation). It will continue until the number of winnings in the mouth 303) reaches 10. Incidentally, in the second high prize support state, the closing period (waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening is set to 0.2 sec.

In the low winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening is opened until 0.2 sec elapses or to the electric accessory 307 (upper operating port 303). It will continue until the number of winnings is three.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the launching handle 54 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 53 is such that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 307 at one time is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low winning support state, the opening time of one electric accessory 307 is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the support state related to the low winning support state, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed in the high prize support state and the low prize support state, and the opening limit time for one opening and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high prize support state. As long as the frequency of winning a prize in the upper operating port 303 increases from the start to the end of the support state, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high winning support state has more opening and closing times than the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high prize support state and the low prize support state, the upper operating port 303 is not substantially won in the support state related to the low prize support state. It is good to say. For example, in the high winning support state, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low winning support state, for one opening. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the open limit number may be set longer than the open limit time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of the upper operating port 303 at one time are not the above, in the low winning support state, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the upper operating port 303.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the open type counter C5 is stored as a type table (distribution information group) in the type table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the type table for ordinary drawings will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, as the type table for the normal map, the type table for the normal map in the low frequency support mode of FIG. 16A is set.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the first open result (first support result) and the second open result (first open result) and the second open result (first open result) and the second open result (first open result) in the general map type table in the low frequency support mode as the distribution destination of the general map winning. 2 Support result) is set. The first opening result is the distribution result in the low winning support state, and the second opening result is the distribution result in the first high winning support state. In the general map type table in the low frequency support mode, among the values of the open type counter C5 of "0 to 99", "0 to 89" corresponds to the first open result, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the first open result. It corresponds to the second opening result. In other words, if the result of the lottery for winning or losing the normal figure shifts to the support state in the low frequency support mode, 90% of them will shift to the low prize support state, and the remaining 10% will shift to the first high prize support state. Move to.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the mode of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the high frequency support mode is only the second high winning support state. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery shifts to the support state, it always shifts to the second high prize support state.

As described above, in the MPU 202, the fluctuation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is determined by using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first execution area AE1. However, in making the determination, the variation display time table for special figures in the variation display time table storage area 223 of ROM 203 is used. Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1. However, in making the determination, the stop result table for special figures in the stop result table storage area 224 of ROM 203 is used.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a ball has entered the lower operating port 305, the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and the ball has entered the upper operating port 303. If it is determined that the winning detection flag has been used, the winning detection flag for the upper operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 235. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35, the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4, and the open type counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4, and the open type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are reduced to 0, respectively. clear. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 35 is executed. The details of the winning process for through will be described later.

Then, after executing the winning process for the operating port in step S105, the timer interrupt process ends. In the winning process for the operating port, based on the winning of the game ball in any of the operating ports 305 and 303, a prize ball command for paying out the game ball based on the winning is set, and a jackpot random number counter is set. Information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning process for through will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won (winned) the through gate 35 by confirming whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If the game ball has not won the through gate 35, the main winning process is terminated as it is. When the through gate 35 has won a prize, in step S202, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the through gate 35.

In step S203, the value stored in the hold number storage area for storing the number of hold information in the electric service hold area Rc is read, and the number of hold information stored in the electric service hold area Rc is shown. It is determined whether or not the reserved storage number FN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the normal figure reserved memory number FN is the upper limit value, the main winning process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the normal figure reserved memory number FN is incremented by 1 in step S204. Then, in step S205, a process of storing each value of the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S301 to S306 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S309 and S310 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S301. In the external signal output process of step S301, the output data such as the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If a command for effect is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S303, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each special figure game turn is executed. In this game time control process, a jackpot determination on the special symbol side, a setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, a display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

After executing the game times control process in step S303, the process proceeds to step S304 to execute the game state transition process. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like.

In the following step S305, the electric service support process for controlling the game in the game on the normal map side is executed. In this electric service support process, support determination on the normal symbol side, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the accessory display unit 44, and electric accessory 307 provided in the upper operating port 303. Drive control, etc.

Each of the processes of steps S303 to S305 will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S306, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S307, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the RAM 204. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 205 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 205 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 202, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last processing of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached in step S308, that is, the previous normal processing It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S310, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, as in step S302, the variation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game rotation control process in step S303 will be described with reference to the flowcharts and the like of FIGS. 20 to 22.

In the game time control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. do. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game round start process of steps S403 to S405 and the game round progress process of steps S406 to S409. Time The control process ends. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the special figure game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating ports 305 and 303 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is in the variable display. In this determination, whether or not the variation display flag (variation display information) is stored (stored) in the variation display flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. It is done by judging. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is cleared when the variation display ends.

If the main display unit 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S403 to S405. In the game round start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN, which is the total number of start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN, is “0”. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the lower operation port 305 and the upper operation port 303. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set for variable display in step S404. After executing the data setting process of the above, and further executing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 in step S405, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S404 and the fluctuation start process in step S405 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S502 to S507 is executed, and when the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S508 to S513.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common hold number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If it is stored, the data stored in the second result display unit hold area Rb should be set for variable display regardless of whether the first start hold storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, the hold for the second result display unit corresponding to the upper operating port 303 is held. The reserved information stored in the area Rb has priority.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S502, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is decremented by one. In the following step S503, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S504, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is moved to the first execution area AE1.

After that, in step S505, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1 and the second area Ra2 → The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3.

In the following step S506, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is memorized, it is erased, and if it is not memorized, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for identifying whether the start of the current variation display is either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

In the following step S507, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information), which is information for causing the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. .. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 to the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, to the lower operating port 305. A special figure shift command including information on the correspondence is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The special figure shift command set in step S507 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the effect control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the first hold light emitting unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 are reduced in the number of holds. Execute the process to change according to.

In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S508, the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is decremented by 1. In the following step S509, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S510, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the holding area Rb for the second result display unit is moved to the first execution area AE1.

After that, in step S511, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the holding area Rb for the second result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Rb1 and the second area Rb2 → The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area Rb1, 3rd area Rb3 → 2nd area Rb2, 4th area Rb4 → 3rd area Rb3.

In the following step S512, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is not stored, the second result display unit flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the following step S513, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. .. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, corresponds to the upper operating port 303. A special figure shift command including information about what is being done is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The special figure shift command set in step S513 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the effect control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the second hold light emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 are reduced in the number of holds. Execute the process to change according to.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the high-probability mode flag (high-probability state information) is stored (stored) in the high-probability mode flag storage area (high-probability state information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Is determined. The high-probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode related to the occurrence of any of the probabilistic jackpot results, and is deleted when the normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

If it is not in the high-probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S602 with reference to the pass / fail table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is one with the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. 14A. Determine if you are doing it. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed by referring to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode in step S603. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is one with the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 14 (b). Determine if you are doing it.

After the process of step S602 or step S603, in steps S604 to S612, the process for setting the game result of the special figure game times is executed, and the first result is displayed in the special figure game times. A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed by either the AS or the second result display unit BS is terminated is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

Specifically, first, in step S604, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S602 or step S603 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, in steps S605 to S610, a process for setting the game result in the case of the jackpot winning, a process for setting the stop result, and the like are executed.

In step S605, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S606 with reference to the type table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 15A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is included in any of the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot result, the numerical range of the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and the numerical range of the 15R probability variation jackpot result. Determine if it is.

On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S607 with reference to the type table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 15B). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is included in the numerical range of the 6R normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

After the processing of step S606 or step S607, in step S608, whether the game result distributed in step S606 or step S607 is either the probability variation jackpot result (either the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result). Judge whether or not. If it is a probabilistic jackpot result, in step S609, the stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the probabilistic jackpot result is displayed in the special figure game times in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS. Executes the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot to set the end of the variation display in the state of. Further, in step S609, various types of RAM 204 provide information (either a 6R probability variation flag or a 15R probability variation flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 which probability variation jackpot result is the hit / fail determination result of this special figure game. It is stored in the flag storage area 235.

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S606 or step S607 is not the probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S608, and the process proceeds to step S610. In step S610, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot, and the address information is stored in the RAM 204. The stop result of is stored in the address storage area. Further, in step S610, information (normal jackpot flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the special figure game is a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If the result of the lottery in step S602 or step S603 is not a big hit, a negative determination is made in step S604 and the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the deviation for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the special figure game round, which is the deviation result, to end the variation display. Executes the stop result setting process for time.

After executing any of the processes of step S609, step S610, and step S611, in step S612, the variation display time of the current special figure game times in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is set. The variable display time setting process is executed. In the variation display time setting process, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is selected from the variation display time table stored in the ROM 203. .. In the variable display time table, one corresponding to the jackpot winning and the one corresponding to the deviation result are set for each of the game times of the first and second special figures. As a result, even if the values of the fluctuation type counter CS are the same, the fluctuation display time can be different depending on the game result. As a result, the pattern of the variable display time to be set can be diversified.

In the following step S613, the special figure variation command and the special figure type command are set. The special figure change command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the change display time. In addition, the special figure type command includes information on the game result. That is, the special figure type command includes information on the 15R probability variation jackpot result, information on the 6R probability variation jackpot result, information on the 6R normal jackpot result, and the like as game result information.

The special figure change command and the special figure type command set in step S613 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the special figure game round based on the received command for changing the special figure and the command for the special figure type, and sets various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. Control. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. NS. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to each special figure game is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

After that, in step S614, among the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS, the result display unit corresponding to the special figure game round starts the variable display of the pattern. In this case, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to this special figure game is the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit is displayed. When the flag is stored, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the special figure game times this time is the second result display unit BS. After that, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 20), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game times progress processing of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the special figure game round has elapsed.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display processing, the result display unit is displayed and controlled so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit related to the special figure game round (light emission control of each display segment). ), And end the game times control process.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S408. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any of the processes of step S609, step S610, and step S611 of the variation start process (FIG. 22), and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43. The main display unit 43 is controlled so that the stop display is displayed.

In the following step S409, the special figure change end command is set. After that, the game times control process is terminated. The special figure variation end command set in step S409 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). By receiving the special figure variation end command, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so that the combination of the final stop symbols in the special figure game round is fixedly displayed (final stop display).

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 23 and 24.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS of the special figure game of 1 is completed. If it is not the timing when the fluctuation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S703, it is determined whether or not the game result of the special figure game this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 6R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S704. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without starting the opening of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the opening stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204.

In the following step S705, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. In the round display start process, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display unit RS displays the round information related to the output.

In the following step S706, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 15R jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If it is not a 15R jackpot, that is, if it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, "6" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S707. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, in the case of a 15R jackpot, "15" is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S708.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the special figure opening command is set in step S709. This set special figure opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This special figure opening command includes information on whether it is a 6R normal jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 15R jackpot. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received special figure opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

In the following step S710, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the 6R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, and if any of the flags is stored, the external output terminal 99 The signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in is defined as the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can grasp what you have done.

If it is determined in step S701 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S712. Here, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 32c. When the large winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0", and it is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S803. It is determined whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is "0".

If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer area T1 is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer area T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S804, and the variable winning drive is performed to open the large winning opening 32a. The unit 32c is in the driving state.

In the following step S805, "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in order to measure the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the large winning opening 32a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

In the following step S806, "10" is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 32a. After that, the special figure opening command is set in step S807, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set special figure release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the big winning opening is open in step S801, the process proceeds to step S808, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is "0". When the value of the first timer area T1 is not "0", it is determined in step S809 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a prize has been generated, whether or not the value of the first prize counter area PC1 is "0" in step S811 after decrementing the value of the first prize counter area PC1 by 1 in step S810. If it is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is.

When the value of the first timer area T1 is "0" in step S808, or when the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is "0" in step S811, it means that the large winning opening closing condition is satisfied. means. In such a case, in step S812, the variable winning drive unit 32c is put into a non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 32a.

In the following step S813, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step S814, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0", in step S815, "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 as a period for maintaining the large winning opening 32a in the closed state. After that, the special figure closing command is set in step S816, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set special figure closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S814 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0", the ending start process is executed in step S817. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next special figure game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After that, in step S818, after setting the special figure ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set special figure ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect based on the received special figure ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 23), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S712, it is determined in step S713 whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". At the same time, it is determined in step S714 whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S715. In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Specifically, if the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a probability change jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the normal jackpot result is obtained. If so, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times.

Then, in step S716, a process for ending the display of the round display unit RS is executed, and in step S717, the end process of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the transition to the open / close execution mode and the deletion of various counters and flags used in the open / close execution mode are performed.

<Processing for electrical support>
Next, the electric service support process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the electric service support process, the normal figure game time control process is executed in step S901, the normal figure game state transition process is executed in step S902, and the present support process is terminated.

That is, the electric service support process basically has the same configuration as the game turn control process (FIG. 20) and the game state transition process (FIG. 23) on the special drawing side. That is, the normal figure game time control process in step S901 corresponds to the game time control process on the special figure side in FIG. 20, and the normal figure game state transition process in step S902 corresponds to the game state transition process on the special figure side in FIG. 23. is doing. Hereinafter, the processing of the game turn control process (step S901) and the game state transition process (step S902) on the normal drawing side will be described in detail.

<Public game game time control process>
First, the normal drawing game time control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

In the normal game time control process, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the support state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support status flag (support status information) is stored (stored) in the support status flag storage area (support status information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The support state flag is stored when shifting to a support state in which opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed in the normal figure game state transition process described later, and when the support state is also terminated in the normal figure game state transition process. Will be erased.

When the support state is in progress, none of the processes after step S1002, that is, the process for starting the game rounds in steps S1003 to S1005 and the process for progressing the game rounds in steps S1006 to S1009 is executed. , End the game time control process of this game. That is, in the support state, the normal game round is not started regardless of whether or not the through gate 35 has been won.

If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the accessory display unit 44 is in the variable display. In this determination, the normal map fluctuation display flag (second fluctuation display information) is stored in the normal map fluctuation display flag storage area (second fluctuation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 (second fluctuation display information). It is performed by determining whether or not it is stored. The normal-figure variation display in-display flag is stored when the variation display is started for the accessory display unit 44, and is deleted when the variation display ends.

If the accessory display unit 44 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the normal drawing game round start process in steps S1003 to S1005. In the normal figure game round start process, first, in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the normal figure hold storage number FN is "0". When the FN of the number of reserved storages in the normal figure is "0", the processing for supporting the electric service is terminated as it is.

If the number of FNs stored in the normal map hold is not "0", the normal map data setting process for setting the data stored in the electric service hold area Rc for variable display is executed in step S1004. In the normal figure data setting process, the normal figure hold storage number FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service hold area Rc is moved to the second execution area AE2. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electric service holding area Rc is executed. That is, it is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Rc1 and clearing the data of the first area Rc1 and from the second area Rc2 to the first area Rc1. , 3rd area Rc3 → 2nd area Rc2, 4th area Rc4 → 3rd area Rc3, and so on, the data in each area is shifted. Then, a normal map shift command (normal map shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area on the normal map side has been shifted. do. In this case, the normal map shift command is read from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the normal map shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.

After the normal map data setting process is executed in step S1004, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed in step S1005, and then the normal map game time control process is terminated.

Here, the normal map fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

In the normal figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204. As described above, the high-frequency support flag is stored in the game state transition process on the special figure side, and is subsequently deleted when the transition condition is satisfied (when the special figure game times continue 100 times).

If it is not in the high-frequency support mode, the pass / fail judgment (support lottery) is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the low-frequency support mode in step S1102, and if it is in the high-frequency support mode, it is high in step S1103. The pass / fail judgment is made by referring to the pass / fail table for the frequency support mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass / fail table for the general drawing is used in common regardless of the level of the support mode, and the pass / fail table referred to in step S1102 and step S1103 are set. It is the same as the pass / fail table to be referred to (see FIG. 14 (c)). Therefore, the process of determining the height of the support mode in step S1101 may be omitted.

After the processing of step S1102 or step S1103, in steps S1104 to S1112, the processing for setting the game result of the current Fuzu game is executed, and the display for the character is displayed in the current Fuzu game. A process for setting a stop result when the variation display executed in the unit 44 is terminated is executed. When setting the stop result, among the various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, the stop result table for general use is used. Is referenced.

Specifically, first, in step S1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1102 or step S1103 is the support state winning. In the case of winning the support state, in steps S1105 to S1111, a process for setting the game result in the case of winning the support state, a process for setting the stop result, and the like are executed.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the high-frequency support mode flag is set, the second high-winning support state will occur as a result of stopping the accessory display unit 44 in the current game game in step S1106. The stop result setting process for the second high prize support state for setting to end the variable display in the displayed state is executed. Further, in step S1106, the RAM 204 provides information (second high prize support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the current game is the open result of the second high prize support state. It is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of.

On the other hand, when the high-frequency support mode flag is not stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S1107 with reference to the general map type table (FIG. 16A) for the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the opening type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of the first opening result or the numerical range of the second opening result.

In the following step S1108, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S1107 is the result of the first high winning support state (second opening result). If the result is the first high prize support state, in step S1109, the first high prize support state will occur as a result of the stoppage of the accessory display unit 44 in the current game game. The stop result setting process for the first high winning support state for setting to end the variable display in the state where the fact is displayed is executed. Further, in step S1109, various types of information (first high prize support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the current general game game is the open result in the first high prize support state are provided in the RAM 204. It is stored in the flag storage area 235.

In the following step S1110, the first high winning support command is set. The set first high winning support command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect based on the received first high winning support command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S1108 is not the result of the first high winning support state, that is, if the distributed game result is the first opening result and the low winning support state is reached, the result is low in step S1111. Execute the stop result setting process for the low winning support state to set to end the variable display while displaying that the winning support state will occur. Further, in step S1111, various flag storage areas of the RAM 204 provide information (low prize support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the current game is the open result in the low prize support state. Store in 235.

If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the first high prize support state, the second high prize support state, and the low are as a result of the stoppage of the character display unit 44 in the current game of the normal figure in step S1112. Executes the stop result setting process for disconnection to set to end the variable display with the display that none of the winning support states will occur. Further, in step S1112, information (a flag that is out of the ordinary figure) for identifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail determination of the current normal figure game is a result of the deviation is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

After executing any of the processes of steps S1106 and S110 to S1112, in step S1113, the normal map variation display time for setting the variable display time of the current normal map game times on the accessory display unit 44. Execute the setting process of.

In the normal figure fluctuation display time setting process, by checking the presence or absence of the above-mentioned high-frequency support mode flag, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode is used. If the high-frequency support mode is set, the ROM 203 Acquires the normal map fluctuation display time information for the high frequency support mode stored in, and sets the value corresponding to the information in the normal map fluctuation display time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. .. On the other hand, in the case of the low frequency support mode, the normal map fluctuation display time information for the low frequency support mode stored in the ROM 203 is acquired, and the value corresponding to the information is set in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Set in the provided normal map fluctuation display time counter area. In these, the fluctuation display time information of the normal map for the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation display time information of the normal map for the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time of the high frequency support mode is averaged more than that of the low frequency support mode. Is set to be shorter. In the present embodiment, 20 sec is uniformly set as the normal map fluctuation display time information for the low frequency support mode.

For each of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, a variable display time table in which a plurality of types of variable display times are set is stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, and each variable display time is stored. The variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter for the general drawing may be selected from the table. In this case, a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the high frequency support mode may be set to be longer than a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the low frequency support mode. Even if the time is selected, the high frequency support mode may be set to be shorter than the low frequency support mode. Further, not only the value of the fluctuation type counter for the normal figure but also the fluctuation display time may be set to be different according to the number of the normal figure reserved storage number FNs, and the larger the number of the normal figure reserved storage number FNs, the more. The variable display time may be set to be short, and vice versa.

After executing the normal map variation display time setting process in step S1113, the normal map variation command and the normal map type command are set in step S1114. The command for changing the normal map includes information on the display time of the normal map change. In addition, the general map type command includes information on the game result.

The command for changing the normal map and the command for the normal figure type set in step S1114 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the normal map game round based on the received command for changing the normal map and the command for the normal map type, and sets various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. Control. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. NS. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to each normal figure game is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

After that, in step S1115, the variable display of the pattern is started on the accessory display unit 44. After that, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the normal figure game round control process (FIG. 26), when the accessory display unit 44 is in the variable display, the normal figure game round progress process of steps S1006 to S1009 is executed. In the process for advancing the Fuzu game times, first, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current Fuzu game times has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information for the normal map stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 is "0". The value of the fluctuation display time information is set in the setting process of the fluctuation display time of the normal map. Further, the value of the set fluctuation display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S1007. In the variable display processing, the accessory display unit 44 controls the display (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order. , End the game time control process of this game.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S1008. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any of the processes of steps S1106, S1109, S1111 and S1112, and the symbol corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44. Controls the display unit 44 for the accessory.

In the following step S1009, the command to end the fluctuation of the normal map is set. After that, the game times control process is terminated. The normal map fluctuation end command set in step S1009 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 and the like so that the combination of the final stop symbols in the normal map game round is fixedly displayed (final stop display) by receiving the normal map variation end command.

<Public game state transition process>
Next, the normal drawing game state transition process of step S902 in the electric service support process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 30 and the like.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the support state is in progress. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the symbol of the normal figure game times of 1 is completed. If it is not the timing when the fluctuation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When it is the timing when the variation display for the normal map is finished, in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current normal map game times corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the first high winning support flag, the second high winning support flag, and the low winning support flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the support state start processing is executed in step S1204. In the start processing, a waiting time for the opening of the normal drawing for waiting without starting the opening of the electric accessory 307 for the opening of the supported state is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the opening of the normal drawing stored in the ROM 203 is set in the counter area for the waiting time for the normal drawing provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The waiting time for the opening of the normal figure is set to 2.0 sec for the first high prize support state (see FIG. 16B), and 0.2 sec for the second high prize support state and the low prize support state. It is set (see FIGS. 16 (b) and 16 (c)).

In the following step S1205, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In the case of the high frequency support mode, it means that the current support state is the first high winning support state or the low winning support state. Therefore, in step S1206, the second support state provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is provided. Set "1" in the round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened. On the other hand, when the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, it means that the support state this time is the second high prize support state. Therefore, in step S1207, "2" is set in the second round counter area RC2. do.

After executing the process of step S1206 or step S1207, the general figure opening command is set in step S1208. This set normal figure opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This Fuzu opening command includes information that the first high prize is supported and information on the waiting time for the Fuzu opening. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the opening effect corresponding to the support state based on the received Fuzu opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

In the following step S1209, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory release signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the open signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the accessory release signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the accessory release signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the support status has occurred.

Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not the first high winning support flag or the second high winning support flag is stored in the RAM 204, and if any of the flags is stored, the external output terminal. The signal output state of the output terminal for the high winning support state signal provided in 99 is defined as the high winning support state signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the high winning support status signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the high winning support status signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the high prize support state has occurred at 10.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the support state is in effect, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the accessory opening / closing process is executed in step S1211. Here, the accessory opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the electric accessory driving unit 332. When the electric accessory 307 is not open, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0", and it is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1303. It is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is "0".

If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" or the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the main accessory opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" and the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1304, and the electric accessory 307 is released to open the electric accessory 307. The drive unit 332 is set to the drive state (accessory opening process).

In the following step S1305, the setting process for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If it is not in the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the support state is the first high winning support state. In the first high winning support state, in step S1403, “1500” (that is, 3 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in order to measure the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the electric accessory 307. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. In the following step S1404, "5" is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the electric accessory 307. After that, this setting process ends.

If the support state is not the first high winning support state in step S1402, it means that the support state is the low winning support state, so that "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. .. In the following step S1406, "3" is set in the second winning counter area PC2, and this setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode in step S1401, "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1407. In the following step S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is “2”. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "2", this setting process is terminated, and if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "2", the second winning counter area PC2 is set in step S1409. Set "10" and end this setting process.

Returning to the description of the accessory opening / closing process (FIG. 29), after executing the setting process for each round in step S1305, the normal figure opening command is set in step S1306 to end the present accessory opening / closing process. This set normal map release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This general map release command includes information that the first high winning prize is supported. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received general map release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If the electric accessory 307 is open in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1307 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is "0". If the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 303 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operating port 303. .. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main character is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a prize has been generated, is the value of the second prize counter area PC2 "0" in step S1310 after decrementing the value of the second prize counter area PC2 by 1 in step S1309? Whether or not it is determined, and if it is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main character is terminated as it is.

When the value of the second timer area T2 is "0" in step S1307, or when the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0" in step S1310, it means that the accessory closing condition is satisfied. .. In such a case, in step S1311, the electric accessory driving unit 332 is put into a non-driving state in order to close the electric accessory 307 (accessory closing process).

In the following step S1312, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0", it means that the first opening process of the electric accessory 307 in the second high winning support state has been completed. Therefore, in step S1314, the second time. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 as the waiting period until the opening process of is executed.

In the following step S1315, the normal figure closing command is set, and the opening / closing process of the main character is completed. This set normal map closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received normal map closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S1313 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0", the end processing of the supported state is executed in step S1316. In this process, a waiting time for the ending of the normal figure for waiting without starting the next normal game for the ending of the supported state is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending of the normal drawing stored in the ROM 203 is set in the counter area for the waiting time for the normal drawing provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The waiting time for the ending of the normal figure is set to 1.0 sec for the first high winning support state (see FIG. 16B), and 0.2 sec for the second high winning support state and the low winning support state. It is set (see FIGS. 16 (b) and 16 (c)).

After that, in step S1317, after setting the normal figure ending command, the opening / closing process of the main character is terminated. This set normal figure ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This Fuzu ending command includes information that the first high winning prize is supported and information about the waiting time for the Fuzu ending set in step S1316. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received normal figure ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

Returning to the description of the normal game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the accessory opening / closing process in step S1211, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. Then, in step S1213, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the end processing of the support state is executed in step S1214. In the end processing of the support state, various flags for the support state such as the first high winning support flag, the second high winning support flag, and the low winning support flag are deleted. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

<About the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, the configuration for performing various effects will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided on the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a special figure hold display control command (first hold display control information) such as a special figure shift command is received. In addition, a special figure game time control command (first game time control information) such as a special figure change command, a special figure type command, and a special figure change end command is received. It also receives open / close execution mode commands (first state transition information) such as the special figure opening command and the special figure ending command. Further, it receives a command for controlling the game times of the game (second game time control information) such as a command for changing the game, a command for classifying the game, and a command for ending the game. In addition, it receives support status commands (second status transition information) such as the first high winning support command, the Fuzu opening command, and the Fuzu ending command.

The ROM 243 is set with various table storage areas 245 in which various tables used for executing various control processes received from the main control device 81 are stored. Further, the RAM 244 receives from the various address storage areas 246 used for storing address information and the like for various effects, the various flag storage areas 247 used for executing various control processes, and the main control device 81. A command storage area 248 for temporarily storing the executed command, various counter areas 249 used for executing various control processes, and hold information and general information on the special drawing side based on the command from the main control device 81. A hold storage area 250 for storing hold information on the drawing side is set. The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command.

The hold storage area 250 corresponds to the hold ball storage area 232 and the electric service hold area 233 in the main control device 81. As shown in FIG. 32, the holding storage area 250 corresponds to the holding ball storage area 232 on the main control device 81 side, and corresponds to the first sub-side holding area 250a, the second sub-side holding area 250b, and the first sub-side. It has an execution area SAE1. The first sub-side holding area 250a corresponds to the first result display section holding area Ra on the main controller 81 side, and the second sub-side holding area 250b corresponds to the second result display section holding area Rb. The first sub-execution area SAE1 corresponds to the first execution area AE1. The first sub-side holding area 250a and the second sub-side holding area 250b have four storage areas, that is, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively. Each area is set so that the information included in the command related to the reserved information on the special drawing side received from the main control device 81 side can be stored.

Further, the holding storage area 250 includes a sub-side electric service holding area 250c and a second sub-side execution area SAE2 corresponding to the electric service holding area 233 on the main control device 81 side. The sub-side electric service holding area 250c corresponds to the electric service holding area Rc, and the second sub-side execution area SAE2 corresponds to the second execution area AE2. The sub-side electric service holding area 250c has four storage areas, that is, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively. Each area is set so that the information included in the command related to the hold information on the normal map side received from the main control device 81 side can be stored.

As shown in FIG. 31, on the output side of the MPU 242, as described above, each of the reserved light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 provided in the front door frame 14 win a prize. The light emitting board 359 provided in the unit 301 and the speaker unit 64 are connected, and the display control device 212 is connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, respectively, are mounted. There is.

The MPU 252 is a special figure hold display control command (first hold display control information) for performing hold display control on the special figure side, and a special figure for performing variable display of the symbol on the special figure side from the effect control device 82. Figure Receives game turn control commands (first game turn control information), open / close execution mode commands (first state transition information) for displaying moving images in open / close execution mode, and the like. In addition, a command for controlling the game times of the game (second game time control information) for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol on the side of the game, a command for performing an effect during the support state (second state transition information), and the like are issued. Receive. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 255).

The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and share them with each character ROM 256 to store image data and the like. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Processing related to various effects on the special drawing side>
The processing related to various effects on the special drawing side will be described. Fluctuation display control processing is mainly set as the processing related to the effect on the special drawing side.

<Variation display control processing performed by the effect control device 82>
The variation display control process on the special drawing side executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

The variation display control process is activated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Then, in the variation display control process, when the special symbol variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbol for one game, and the main control device. When the special figure variation end command transmitted from 81 is received, the process of displaying the symbol variation display as the final stop is executed.

In the variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, whether or not the special symbol game is being performed in step S1501, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 41 is executing the variation display of the symbol for one game. Judge whether or not. When the change display of the symbol for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the special figure change command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the special figure change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. When the special figure change command is received, the special figure change start process is executed in step S1503, and then the change display control process is terminated. Here, the special figure variation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

First, in step S1601, the special figure variation command received this time is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the variation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the main control device 81 transmits the special figure change command, it also transmits the special figure type command. Therefore, in step S1601, the special figure type command received together with the special figure change command received this time is read, and the information of the probability variation jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result and 15R probability variation jackpot result) and the normal jackpot result are read from the command. Information (6R normal jackpot result) is specified. Then, in step S1601, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and variable display time. Information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the first sub-execution area SAE1 in the hold storage area 250 of the RAM 244.

In the following step S1602, based on the information grasped in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the game result of the special figure game time to be started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, a 6R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot result, or a 6R normal jackpot result, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed in the following step S1603.

In the effect setting process for the jackpot, the stop result determination process for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result in which the same specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is obtained this time. Determined as a result of the suspension of. Further, in the case of the 6R normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result this time. .. Further, in the effect setting process for big hits, the process of setting the effect pattern for big hits such as normal reach and super reach is executed with reference to the variable display time of the game times executed this time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1602 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1604. In step S1604, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S1605, and the effect setting process for generating reach is executed.

In the effect setting process for the reach generation, the stop result determination process for the out-of-reach is executed. Specifically, the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this time. In this case, the type of combination of the out-of-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the effect setting process for generating reach, the process of setting the effect pattern for out-of-reach such as normal reach and super reach is executed with reference to the variable display time of the game times executed this time.

If the reach does not occur in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1606, and the effect setting process for normal deviation is executed. In the effect setting process for normal deviation, the stop result determination process for non-reach generation is executed. In such a process, the stop result of this time is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the off-reach symbols is not stopped. Further, in the effect setting process for normal deviation, a process of setting an effect pattern for normal deviation in which reach does not occur is executed.

After executing the processes of step S1603, step S1605, or step S1606, in step S1607, commands including the above-determined stop result and effect pattern information are output to the display control device 212 as stop result commands and pattern commands, respectively. Execute the process to be performed. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 to execute the effect in the special figure game round this time, based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

In the following step S1608, after executing the process of starting the effect for the special figure game round, the process for starting the change of the special figure is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 64 and the display / light emitting unit 63 is started based on the effect pattern determined above, and the effect for the special figure game round is started.

Returning to the description of the variation display control process (FIG. 33), if the special figure game is not in progress in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1504, and whether or not the special figure variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. Is determined. If the special figure change end command has not been received, the special figure change intermediate process is executed in step S1505, and then the change display control process ends. In the special figure change processing, the display control device 212 is controlled so that the special figure game times are executed with the effect content determined in the special figure change start process. On the other hand, when the special figure variation end command is received in step S1504, the special figure variation end process is executed in step S1506, and then the present variation display control process is terminated. In the special figure fluctuation end process, as the process for ending the special figure game round, the fluctuation display is terminated in order to notify the game result of the special figure game round, and various flags and counters used in the special figure game round are displayed. Execute the clear process.

<About processing related to various productions on the Fuzu side>
Next, the processing related to various effects on the normal drawing side will be described. The processes related to various effects on the normal map side are roughly classified into the normal map variation display control process related to the effect control of the normal map game times and the support state process related to the effect control for the support state. These processes are started every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

<Public map fluctuation display control processing>
First, the normal map variation display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. In the normal figure fluctuation display control process, when the command for normal figure change transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the change display of the normal symbol for one game and also starts the main control device 81. When the command for ending the fluctuation of the normal symbol transmitted from the control device 81 is received, the process of displaying the fluctuation display of the normal symbol as the final stop is executed.

In the normal figure variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, whether or not the normal figure game is in progress in step S1701, that is, the symbol display device 41 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol for one game. Determine if it is running. When the variation display of the normal symbol for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the command for fluctuation of the normal symbol transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the command for changing the normal map has not been received, the normal map change display control process is terminated as it is. If the command for changing the normal figure is received, the process for starting the change in the normal figure is executed in step S1703, and then the change display control process for the normal figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the normal symbol for one game is performed, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the normal map variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the normal map fluctuation end command has not been received, the normal map fluctuation display control process is terminated after the normal map fluctuation processing is executed in step S1705. If the normal map variation end command is received in step S1704, the normal map variation display control process is terminated after the normal map variation end process is executed in step S1706. In the process for ending the fluctuation of the normal figure, as the process for ending the game of the normal figure, the variation display is terminated in order to notify the game result of the game of the normal figure, and various flags and counters used in the game of the normal figure are displayed. Execute the clear process.

<Process for starting fluctuation of general map>
The normal map variation start process is a process for starting the effect for the normal map game round based on the reception of the normal map variation command transmitted from the main control device 81. Here, prior to the explanation of the normal drawing fluctuation start processing, the production contents of the normal drawing game times will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 36 (a).

As described above, the variable display of the normal figure game times on the display screen G is performed by switching the display colors of the two display units in the normal figure display area P. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (a1), when the normal drawing game round is started from the situation where the display colors of the two display units are displayed in the same color or the first display color (for example, white) having substantially the same color. As shown in FIG. 36 (a2), the display color of one display unit is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) which is a color different from the previous colors (in the figure, the difference in the color of the display unit is hatched). It is displayed differently depending on the.) After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (a3), the color of the display unit on the side switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display unit is the first display color. Is switched to the second display color, and as shown in FIG. 36 (a4), the color of each display unit is switched again. The variable display of the normal game times is basically repeated switching of the display colors of these two display units (Fig. 36 (a2)-> Fig. 36 (a3)-> Fig. 36 (a4)-> Fig. 36 (a2). Repeatedly). This display color switching is set to make one round in about 0.5 sec, and it is difficult for the player to identify each display before and after the switching.

When the variable display time of the normal figure game times elapses, the result of the game of the normal figure game times is notified as to whether the result is the open result or the result of the deviation from the support state. In the case of the opening result, as shown in FIG. 36 (a5), both of the two display units become the second display color and the variable display ends, and in the case of the disengaged result, FIG. 36 (a1). As shown in the above, the two display units are both set to the first display color, and the variable display ends. That is, the mode of the variable display and the mode of notifying the game result (result of stopping the variable display) in the normal-figure game round have a simple configuration as compared with the special-figure game round side.

By the way, in the normal map variation start process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36 (b), first, in step S1801, the command for normal map variation received this time is read, and the variation is displayed from the command. Identify time information. Further, as described above, when the main control device 81 transmits the command for changing the normal map, the main control device 81 also transmits the command for the normal map type. Therefore, in step S1801, the command for the normal map type received together with the command for changing the normal map received this time is read, and the game result information (opening result or deviation result) is specified from the command. Then, in step S1801, the information on whether or not the release result and the information on the fluctuation display time are grasped from the above-specified information, and the grasped information is transferred to the second sub-execution area SAE2 in the hold storage area 250 of the RAM 244. Remember.

In the following step S1802, a process of setting the stop result in the normal drawing game round to be started this time is executed based on the information grasped in step S1801. That is, when the information specified in step S1801 is the release result, the stop result is displayed so that the two display units are stopped and displayed in the second display color at the end of the variation display in the current game. If the information specified in step S1801 is out of order, the two display units will be stopped and displayed in the first display color at the end of the variation display in this game. Set the stop result.

Then, in step S1803, the process of outputting a command to the display control device 212 is executed so as to start the effect for the normal map game, and then the process for starting the change of the normal map is ended. Based on the received command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 to execute the effect in the current game game. It should be noted that, as described above, since the normal map game round only switches the display colors of the two display units in the normal map display area P, the display control device 212 receives the above command. Based on this, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to periodically execute the display color switching display of the display unit.

<Processing during fluctuations in the general map>
In the normal map fluctuation processing, the display control device 212 is controlled so that the normal map game times are executed with the effect content determined in the normal map fluctuation start process. Further, in the processing for changing the normal drawing, when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state, the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 of the winning unit 301 produce a special light emitting effect. The light emitting substrate 359 is controlled to be executed. This special light emitting effect is executed prior to the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307, and suggests to the player that the opening / closing control of the first high winning support state is executed in the electric accessory 307. .. Here, the content of the special light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 37 prior to the explanation of the processing for changing the normal drawing.

Before the start of the special light emitting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (a1), both the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 are controlled to be turned off. Then, when the result of the normal figure winning / failing determination is the result of shifting to the first high winning support state, after the start of the variable display in the general map game times, at the end of the variable display (timing t3 in FIG. 37 (b)). At the timing (timing t1) 3 seconds before, the light emitting modes of the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 are switched so as to start the special light emitting effect.

In the special light emitting effect, first, as shown in FIG. 37 (a2), the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 are switched to the first light emitting state A2 that emits white light. The first light emitting state A2 is executed so that the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 start light emission at the same time, and is continued for 1 sec from the start of the light emission. During the execution of the first light emitting state, each of the light emitting units 311, 317 is controlled so as to maintain white light emission.

At the timing t2 1 sec after the start of the first light emitting state A2, as shown in FIG. 37 (a3), the light emitting colors of the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 gradually change to red. It is switched to the light emitting state A3. The second light emitting state A3 is continued for 2 seconds from the timing t2. That is, the second light emitting state A3 is performed so that the switching to the red light emitting is completed 2 seconds after the start.

During the execution of the second light emitting state A3, the lighting state of each light emitting body 360 is controlled so that the first light emitting unit 311 continuously emits light while the second light emitting unit 317 blinks. This is because the game ball flows down in front of the first light emitting unit 311 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, while the second light emitting unit 317 does not overlap with the flowing area of the game ball (see FIG. 8). Therefore, the light emitting modes of the two are different. That is, the first light emitting unit 311 emphasizes the visibility of the game ball to produce a light emitting effect that does not cause a drastic change in the light emitting state, and the second light emitting unit 317 makes it easier to attract the player's attention by blinking. In addition, in order to further improve the visibility of the game ball in the first light emitting unit 311, the light emitting intensity (light emitting brightness) of the first light emitting unit 311 may be lower than that of the second light emitting unit 317.

After the timing t3 2 sec after the start of the second light emitting state A3, as shown in FIG. 37 (a4), the third light emitting state A4 in which the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 emit red light is continued. Even during the execution of the third light emitting state A4, the first light emitting unit 311 continuously emits light and the second light emitting unit 317 is controlled to blink as in the second light emitting state A3. This third light emitting state A4 is continued until the end of the special light emitting effect. The special light emission effect ends with the switching from the open state to the closed state of the electric accessory 307.

By the way, the above special light emitting effect is not performed when the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed in the low winning support state and the second high winning support state, and is not performed when the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed in the first high winning support state. It is a dedicated production.

Next, the process for changing the normal map executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. Here, the control process related to the special light emission effect will be mainly described.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the special light emission effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special light emission flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The special light emitting flag is stored when the special light emitting effect is started, and is erased when the special light emitting effect is finished.

If the special light emission effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the first high winning support command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the first high winning support command has not been received, the processing during this fluctuation is terminated.

When the first high winning support command is received, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not it is the execution timing of the special light emission effect. Specifically, after grasping the fluctuation display time of the current normal map game time based on the command for normal map change transmitted from the main control device 81, is the remaining fluctuation display time of the game time 3 sec? Judge whether or not. If it is not the execution timing of the special light emission effect, the processing during this fluctuation is terminated.

When it is the execution timing of the special light emitting effect, the execution process of the first light emitting state A2 is performed in step S1904, and the light emitting modes of the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 are switched to the first light emitting state A2. In the following step S1905, a special light emission flag is set in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244, and then in step S1906, a first light emission flag is set in the flag storage area 247. The first light emitting flag is a flag indicating that the first light emitting state A2 is being executed. Next, in step S1907, “500” (that is, 1 sec) is set in the timer area ST provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 244, and the processing during this fluctuation is terminated. The value set in step S1907 is decremented by 1 each time the normal figure variation display control process (FIG. 35) is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If the special light emission effect is being executed in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1908 to determine whether or not the first light emission state A2 is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first light emitting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. If the first light emitting state A2 is being executed, in step S1909, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area ST is "0", that is, whether or not the execution period of the first light emitting state A2 has elapsed. judge. If the value of the timer area ST is not "0", the processing during this fluctuation is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer area ST is "0", the execution process of the second light emitting state A3 is performed in step S1910, and the light emitting modes of the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 are changed to the second light emitting state. Switch to A3. Further, in step S1910, the first light emitting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is erased. In the following step S1911, the second light emission flag is set in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The second light emitting flag is a flag indicating that the second light emitting state A3 is being executed. Next, in step S1912, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the timer area ST, and the processing during this fluctuation is completed.

If the first light emitting state A2 is not being executed in step S1908, the process proceeds to step S1913 to determine whether or not the second light emitting state A3 is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second light emitting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. If the second light emitting state A3 is being executed, in step S1914, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area ST is "0", that is, whether or not the execution period of the second light emitting state A3 has elapsed. judge. If the value of the timer area ST is not "0", the processing during this fluctuation is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer area ST is "0", the execution process of the third light emitting state A4 is performed in step S1915, and the light emitting modes of the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 are changed to the third light emitting state. Switch to A4. Further, in step S1915, the second light emitting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is erased. After that, the processing during this fluctuation is terminated.

If the second light emitting state A3 is not being executed in step S1913, it means that the third light emitting state A4 is being executed. Therefore, in order to continue the third light emitting state A4, the processing during this fluctuation is terminated as it is. do.

<Processing for support status>
Next, the support state processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a process for a support state, and FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect during the support state.

In the support state process, the symbol display device 41 performs a process for producing an effect during the support state based on the support state commands such as the normal figure opening command and the normal figure ending command transmitted from the main control device 81. Execute.

That is, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the normal drawing game is being executed. If the normal game game is being executed, the support status process is terminated as it is. In this process, in the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display control process, the normal figure game round is being executed from the execution of the normal figure change start process to the end of the normal figure change end process, which is more specific. Specifically, the variation display is started in the normal figure display area P in the accessory display unit 44 on the main control device 81 side and the symbol display device 41, the variation display is completed, and the result of the winning / failing lottery on the normal figure side is obtained. It is determined that the normal game game is being executed until it is notified as a stop result. Regarding this determination, for example, in the process of starting the production for the normal map game round in step S1803 of the normal map fluctuation start process (FIG. 36 (b)), the normal map is executed in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. Stores the medium flag. Then, when the confirmation display is executed (the variation display is terminated) in the normal map fluctuation end processing, the normal map execution flag is deleted, and whether or not the flag is stored is determined in step S2001. It is preferable to have a configuration for determining.

If the game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the immediately preceding game is the result corresponding to the transition to the support state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result of the immediately preceding Fuzu game is the open result. If it is not the release result but the deviation result, the support status process is terminated as it is. If the result is open, the process proceeds to step S2003.

It should be noted that even in the production during this support state, the configuration may be different depending on the game state on the special drawing side. Further, the effect in the support state may be different depending on each opening result on the normal drawing side, and the opening result selected may be different depending on the game state on the special drawing side. .. By doing so, it is possible to preferably notify the support state according to the state on the special drawing side.

In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the opening control of the electric accessory 307 is being executed as a result of shifting to the support state. If it is determined that the opening / closing control is not being executed, that is, if the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is not currently being executed even if the game result of the immediately preceding normal game is the opening result, step S2004 is performed. move on. The case of proceeding to step S2004 is the waiting time before the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed, that is, the opening period (OP period), or after the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed. It is conceivable that the waiting time until the start of the game round, that is, the ending period (ED period), or the situation in which the hold information on the Fuzu side, which triggers the Fuzu game round, has not been acquired. In the present embodiment, a dedicated effect is set when the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed in the first high winning support state, and in the following steps S2004 to S2009, the above-mentioned dedicated effect is performed during the OP period or ED. Execute the process to be performed during the period.

In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the general map opening command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the normal figure opening command has been received, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the first high winning support command from the main control device 81 has been received. When the opening command and the first high winning support command are received, it means that the electric accessory 307 is in the OP period immediately before the opening / closing control is performed in the first high winning support state. Therefore, step S2006. The process for performing the special display effect B1 is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

The special display effect B1 is for notifying the player that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed in the first high winning support state, that is, the situation in which it is easy to obtain the winning / failing lottery opportunity of the second special figure. belongs to. As the special display effect B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (a1), a character display 381 such as "Aim for electric chew !!" or a display screen G at the lower center of the display screen G in the symbol display device 41. It is conceivable that the background color in the above is changed to a dedicated color different from the background color up to that point.

The "electric chew" is an abbreviation for an electric tulip, in other words, a common name for an electric accessory 307 and an upper actuating port 303. Further, displaying the display 381 in the lower center of the display screen G corresponds to the position of the electric accessory 307 and the upper operating port 303 below the center of the display screen G, so that the display 381 is displayed on the display screen G. It is displayed in the area near the electric accessory 307 and the upper operating port 303.

In step S2006 of FIG. 39, a command including information on the contents of the special display effect B1 is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for the special display effect B1 from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

If it is determined in step S2004 that the general figure opening command has not been received, if it is determined in step S2005 that the first high winning support command has not been received, or after the process of step S2006 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2007. .. In step S2007, it is determined whether or not the normal figure ending command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the normal figure ending command has been received, it is determined in step S2008 whether or not the first high winning support command from the main control device 81 has been received. When the normal ending command and the first high winning support command are received, it means that the electric accessory 307 is in the ED period immediately after the opening / closing control is performed in the first high winning support state. Therefore, step S2009 The process for performing the special ending effect B2 is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

The special ending effect B2 is for notifying the player that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state has ended, that is, the situation in which the reservation on the special figure side is likely to be obtained has ended. It is a thing. In the special ending effect B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (a2), in the lower center of the display screen G on the symbol display device 41, a character display 382 such as "help end" and a background color on the display screen G are displayed. It is conceivable to return to the normal color before the execution of the special display effect B1, or to change the background color during execution of the special display effect B1 or an ending color different from the normal color.

In step S2009 of FIG. 39, a command including information on the contents of the special ending effect B2 is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for the special ending effect B2 from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

After the execution of step S2009, the end processing of the special light emission effect (FIG. 37 (a)) is executed in step S2010. In this step, the light emitting board 359 is controlled so as to turn off the first and second light emitting units 311, 317, and further, the special light emitting flags stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 are erased.

On the other hand, if the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is being executed in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2011, the support state process is performed, and then the support state process ends. In the process during the support state in step S2011, a process for continuing the special display effect started with the start of the OP period is executed.

The special display effect B1 and the special ending effect B2 are not performed when the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed in the low prize support state and the second high prize support state, and the first high prize support is performed. It is a special production of the state.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game when the electric accessory 307 is open / closed controlled in the first high winning support state will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

As shown in FIG. 41, when a prize is won in the through gate 35 at the timing t11, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection sensor, and this is used as an opportunity to draw a lottery for winning or losing the game and to display the character display unit 44. The start of the variable display of the figure game times is executed. This fluctuation display is continued for 20 seconds and is performed until the timing t13.

When the result of the above-mentioned common figure winning / failing lottery is the result of shifting to the first high winning support state, the special light emitting effect by the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 of the winning unit 301 is performed at the timing t12 after the start of the fluctuation. To be started. This special light emitting effect is for suggesting to the player that the opening / closing control of the first high winning support state is executed by the electric accessory 307. As described above, the special light emission effect is started 3 seconds before the timing t13 when the variation display of the normal game times ends, and then the light emission mode is sequentially switched from the first light emission state A2 to the third light emission state A4. (See FIG. 37).

When the variable display of the normal drawing game times is completed at the timing t13, the OP period in the first high winning support state is started, and the special display effect B1 is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. This special display effect B1 is for notifying the player that it is easy to obtain the winning / failing lottery opportunity of the second special figure. Specifically, on the display screen G, "Aim for the electric chew". 381 characters such as "!!" are displayed (see FIG. 40).

When the opening period ends at the timing t14, the electric accessory 307 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball is easily won in the upper operating port 303.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the upper operating port 303 is higher than that of the lower operating port 305 when the jackpot is won, and the probability of occurrence of the 15R jackpot is higher. The upper operating port 303 is more advantageous for the player than the opening 305. Therefore, the player strongly desires that the game ball wins a prize in the upper operating port 303.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 307 is closed, it is difficult to win a prize in the upper operating port 303, and the chance of winning a game ball in the upper operating port 303 is very limited. ing. That is, in the gaming state where the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the low frequency support mode, even if the result of the winning / losing lottery on the normal drawing side shifts to the support state, most of the opening / closing control is performed in the low winning support state. Therefore, the constant winning of the upper operating port 303 can be expected only during the period of transition to the high frequency support mode. In particular, the high-frequency support mode can occur only when the winning / losing lottery result on the special drawing side becomes a big hit, so for a player who has never won a big hit, there is an opportunity to win a game ball in the upper operating port 303. It is almost nonexistent.

Therefore, the first high winning support state that occurs in the low frequency support mode is a valuable opportunity for the player to expect a prize in the upper operating port 303, and the player can expect the opening / closing control to be performed during the period when the opening / closing control is performed. I long for as many game balls as possible to win the upper operating port 303. Moreover, since the frequency of occurrence of the first high winning support state in the low frequency support mode is low, the player's desire to effectively utilize such a state becomes stronger.

In such a situation, depending on the positional relationship between the variable operating port provided with the electric accessory and the non-variable operating port not provided with the electric accessory, when the electric accessory is opened, the game is played. When the ball wins the non-variable operating port, it may not reach the variable operating port. That is, even though the open state is set, the non-variable operating port deprives the player of the opportunity to win a prize in the movable operating port, which may cause a disadvantage that the player cannot fully enjoy the benefit of opening the electric accessory.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the electric accessory 307 is arranged above (upstream) the lower operating port 305 and the electric accessory 307 is in the open state, it is received. The region RA is configured to be formed on the first flow path R1 (flow path of the game ball to the lower operating port 305). Therefore, it is suppressed that the game ball flowing down toward the lower operating port 305 reaches the receiving area RA before reaching the lower operating port 305, and the reception of the game ball is hindered by the lower operating port 305. .. As a result, the winning opportunity to the upper operating port 303 is stably secured, and the player can appropriately enjoy the profit from the occurrence of the first high winning support state.

Moreover, when the electric accessory 307 is in the closed state, the game ball can flow down in front of the electric accessory 307 (opening / closing member 331), so that the electric accessory 307 can play the game to the lower operating port 305. The flow of the sphere is not obstructed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 41, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state at the timing t14, the first game ball wins the upper operating port 303 at the timing t15 immediately after that, and the second result is accompanied by this. The display unit BS starts the variable display of the game times of the second special figure. While the upper limit period of the open state is set for 3 seconds until the timing t18, since the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 sec, four game balls are sequentially won following the first game ball. (Timing t16 to Timing t17), a total of 5 game balls win. The number of reserved storages in the second special figure increases in order with the winning of the second and subsequent game balls, and the number of reserved storages becomes four when the fifth game ball wins.

Here, the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is set to four, and even if there is a prize in the upper operating port 303 exceeding that, the prize will be linked to the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure. It will not be attached. That is, a prize that exceeds the upper limit of the number of reserved memories is invalid in relation to the winning / losing lottery.

In this regard, the open state of the first high winning support state is configured to end on the condition that 3 sec elapses from the start of the open state or the number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 reaches five. There is. As a result, a total of five game balls can be won, one corresponding to the variable display of the game times of the first second special figure and four until the number of reserved memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit. However, the number of winnings may not exceed that. That is, it is possible to make the configuration in which the above-mentioned invalid winning is less likely to occur while maximizing the number of reserved memories, and the player can effectively utilize the opening and closing of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state.

In particular, since the winning unit 301 is configured so that the winning of the upper operating port 303 is not easily hindered by the lower operating port 305, the maximum number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 and the opening upper limit period of the electric accessory 307 are set as described above. It is possible to enhance the significance of the determination as follows. That is, when the electric accessory 307 is opened, an event occurs in which the number of winning balls to the upper operating port 303 does not reach 5 even after 3 seconds, which is the upper limit of the opening period, has elapsed from the start of the opening. It is suppressed, and the player can more effectively utilize the opening opportunity of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state.

When the fifth game ball wins at the timing t17, the number of winning balls reaches the upper limit, so that the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state. After that, the ending effect is performed until the timing t19 (see FIG. 40).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The upper operating port 303 provided with the electric accessory 307 is arranged above the lower operating port 305, and when the electric accessory 307 is opened, the receiving region RA is formed on the first flow path R1. It was configured in. As a result, the player can properly enjoy the profit from the occurrence of the first high winning support state.

A second guide portion 371 is provided on the front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331, and the second guide portion 371 guides the game ball to the lower operating port 305 in front of the opening / closing member 331. As a result, the front region of the opening / closing member 331 can be utilized as a guide region. In this case, the flow mode of the game ball can be stabilized as compared with the configuration in which the game ball only flows down in front of the opening / closing door, and the game ball can be satisfactorily guided to the lower operating port 305.

The first light emitting unit 311 is arranged adjacent to the electric accessory 307, and the game ball can flow down in front of the first light emitting unit 311. Then, the first light emitting unit 311 is configured to execute the special light emitting effect before the first high winning support state occurs (before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state).

Where the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball wins the upper operating port 303, the electric accessory 307 and the first light emitting unit 311 are close to each other, so that the player's attention points are concentrated. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 303 while visually recognizing the special light emitting effect, and it is possible to effectively pay attention to each of the special light emitting effect and the electric accessory 307. It becomes possible to increase to.

Further, since the special light emission effect is started before the occurrence of the first high winning support state, the player can predict the occurrence of the support state in advance. As a result, not only can the player be provided with a preparation period for aiming at the electric accessory 307 (upper operating port 303), but also whether or not the game ball passing in front of the first light emitting unit 311 wins the upper operating port 303. It is possible to provide playability to enjoy the game.

Further, since the first light emitting unit 311 is provided on the flow path (first to third flow paths R1 to R3) of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, the flow path is not only used as the flow area of the game ball, but also. It can also be used as a notification area. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the flow-down area and the notification area are separate, it becomes easier to secure a large flow-down area, and it becomes possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

The width of the first light emitting unit 311 (transmissive unit 341) is set to the size of a plurality of game balls, and a plurality of flow paths are formed on the first light emitting unit 311. When the game ball passes in front of the first light emitting unit 311, there is a concern that the visibility of the special light emitting effect by the game ball may be lowered. However, according to this configuration, one flow path on the first light emitting unit 311. Even if the game ball flows down, the special light emission effect can be visually recognized through the remaining part. As a result, it is possible to suitably eliminate the inconvenience that it is difficult to grasp the content of the special light emission effect due to the game ball passing in front of the first light emitting unit 311, and to achieve both the flow area and the notification area. Above, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

The symbol display device 41, the electric accessory 307, and the first light emitting unit 311 are arranged vertically, and the first light emitting unit 311 is arranged between the symbol display device 41 and the electric accessory 307. According to this configuration, while the player is paying attention to the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the line of sight is shifted to the first light emitting unit 311 at the start of the special light emitting effect, and then according to the flow of the game ball. The line of sight may be shifted to the electric accessory 307. That is, the natural movement of the line of sight downward starting from the display screen G makes it possible to visually recognize the first light emitting unit 311 and the electric accessory 307 in an appropriate order, and facilitates understanding of the effect. ..

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the upper winning portion in the winning unit 301 is different from that of the first embodiment. The winning portion 401 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. 42 is a front view of the winning unit 301, FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the winning unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 42, and FIG. It is a front view. The same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the upper winning portion 401 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the second guide portion 403 that guides the game ball in front of the opening / closing member 331 extends from the rear (back side) of the opening / closing member 331. It is set up. On the opening / closing member 331, a notch 411 through which the second guide portion 403 can be inserted is formed. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 44A, the second guide portion 403 is provided on the partition wall 405 that partitions the upper guide passage 333. Specifically, it is integrally formed with the upper wall portion 405a of the partition wall 405, and extends linearly from the upper wall portion 405a to the front side (front side) of the opening / closing member 331.

The vertical width of the second guide portion 403 is different between the portion located behind the opening / closing member 331 in the closed position and the portion located in front of the opening / closing member 331. Specifically, the vertical width of the rear portion 403a located behind the opening / closing member 331 is smaller than that of the front portion 403b located in the front, and the height position of the lower end of the rear portion 403a is smaller than that of the front portion 403b. It's getting higher. As a result, a space having a height larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the upper guide passage 333 and the bottom surface of the passage 333a. This is for allowing the game ball to move smoothly in the upper guide passage 333.

The upper guide passage 333 is configured to collect the game balls that have entered the upper guide passage 333 in one place so that the game balls that have won prizes in the upper operation port 303 can be detected one by one. That is, the rear wall portion 405b of the partition wall 405 is provided with an opening 407 (see FIG. 42) having a size that allows one game ball to pass through, and a detection sensor for the game ball that has passed through the opening 407. It is configured to detect by. Therefore, the bottom surface of the passage 333a is inclined so as to guide the game ball of the upper guide passage 333 to the opening 407, and the game ball entering the upper guide passage 333 is laterally inclined on the bottom surface 333a of the passage. It will move in the direction.

By setting the vertical width of the rear portion 403a as described above, the game ball can smoothly move in the upper guide passage 333, and the stagnation of the game ball in the upper guide passage 333 is suppressed. As a result, inconveniences such as the game ball in the upper guide passage 333 hindering the winning of the subsequent game ball to the operating port 303 and the displacement of the opening / closing member 331 to the closed position are eliminated. ..

On the other hand, the vertical width of the front portion 403b of the second guide portion 403 is the same as that of the second guide portion 371 according to the first embodiment. That is, the distance L6 from the first guide portion 365 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance L7 from the lower operating port case 337 (lower operating port 305) is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. ..

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, a vertically long cutout portion 411 is formed at the upper edge portion of the opening / closing member 331 corresponding to the second guide portion 403. The second guide portion 403 can be inserted into the cutout portion 411 at least in a state where the opening / closing member 331 is located at the closed position. As a result, interference between the opening / closing member 331 and the second guide portion 403 is avoided, and the opening / closing member 331 can rotate.

Here, in the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, only the opening / closing member 331 is displaced and the second guide portion 403 is immobile. .. That is, the position of the second guide portion 403 is fixed. Therefore, the second guide portion 403 can be extended within a range that does not come into contact with the window panel 62, and the distance L8 from the window panel 62 can be easily made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing in front of the second guide unit 403, and it is possible to preferably guide the game ball.

Even in the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the electric accessory 307 is in the closed state, the game ball on the first flow path R1 is the first guide portion 365 and the second guide. When the electric accessory 307 is guided to the lower operating port 305 by the unit 403 and the electric accessory 307 is in the open state, the game balls on the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 can win a prize in the upper operating port 303. Therefore, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
In this modification, the configuration of the second guide portion is different from that of the second embodiment. The second guide portion 451 of this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the second guide portion 451 and is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the CC line cross section of FIG. 42. The same components as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 46A, the second guide portion 451 according to this modification faces the front surface 331b in front of the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position so as to be separated from the front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331. A confrontation portion 453 is provided. Specifically, the vertical width of the second guide portion 451 remains narrow and extends from the rear to the front of the opening / closing member 331, and becomes wider in front of the opening / closing member 331 toward the front. There is.

The edge portion 453a of the confronting portion 453 is formed in a curved shape in a side view (in the axial direction of the rotation axis of the opening / closing member 331), and specifically, is formed in an arc shape that is convex forward. The curvature of the edge portion 453a corresponds to the curvature of the rotation locus of the opening / closing member 331, and in detail, it is substantially the same as the curvature of the locus PT of the one point J on the bottom surface 411a of the notch portion 411. In this case, the opening / closing member 331 can be rotated while maintaining a gap having a substantially constant size with the second guide portion 451.

With such a configuration, the size (vertical dimension) of the notch portion 411 can be reduced in order to suppress the interference between the opening / closing member 331 and the second guide portion 451. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably guide the game ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing member 331 while suppressing a decrease in the rigidity and strength of the opening / closing member 331 due to the notch portion 411.

In the above modified example, as shown in FIG. 46B, the edge portion 453a of the confronting portion 453 may be linear. Also in this case, the notch portion 411 can be made smaller than the configuration of the second embodiment, and the rigidity and strength of the opening / closing member 331 can be improved.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the upper winning portion in the winning unit 301 is different from that of the first embodiment. The winning section 501 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. 47 is a front view of the winning unit 301, FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the winning unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 49 is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 47. The same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the upper winning portion 501 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the second guide portion 503 that guides the game ball in front of the opening / closing member 511 extends from the rear (back side) of the opening / closing member 511. It is installed. On top of that, the opening / closing member 511 is formed with a through hole 517 through which the second guide portion 503 can be inserted. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 49A, the second guide portion 503 is provided on the partition wall 405 that partitions the upper guide passage 333. Specifically, it is integrally formed with the upper wall portion 405a of the partition wall 405, and extends linearly from the upper wall portion 405a to the front side (front side) of the opening / closing member 331.

The distance between the second guide portion 503 and the first guide portion 365 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance between the second guide portion 503 and the lower operating port case 337 (lower operating port 305) is the diameter of the game ball. Is bigger than. Further, the distance between the second guide portion 503 and the window panel 62 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the second guide portion 503, the height position of the lower end of the rear portion 503a is higher than that of the front portion 503b in the upper guide passage 333, as in the second embodiment. This is to facilitate the movement of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the opening / closing member 511 includes a standing wall-shaped front wall portion 513 and an extending portion 515 extending rearward from the back surface of the front wall portion 513. The front wall portion 513 and the extension portion 515 are integrally formed, and the opening / closing member 511 has a substantially L-shaped vertical cross section.

The opening / closing member 511 is held by the base body 320 in a state where it can be linearly moved in the front-rear direction, and is configured to open / close the upper operating port 303 by moving back and forth. That is, the closed position where the protrusion from the front surface of the game board 24 (plate-shaped base portion 321) is suppressed and covers the upper operating port 303, and the upper operating port protruding forward from the front surface 321a of the game board 24 (plate-shaped base portion 321). It can be displaced to the open position where the 303 is opened. The upper surface of the extension portion 515, that is, the ball receiving surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear, and the game ball entering the opening / closing member 511 is guided to the rear.

As shown in FIG. 47, a through hole 517 is formed in the front wall portion 513 corresponding to the second guide portion 403. The second guide portion 503 can be inserted into the through hole 517. As a result, interference between the opening / closing member 511 and the second guide portion 503 is avoided, and the opening / closing member 511 can be moved back and forth.

By the way, in the configuration in which the second guide portion 503 is inserted into the through hole of the opening / closing member, if the opening / closing member is displaced between the open position and the closed position by rotation, the second guide portion 503 interferes with the opening / closing member. In order to avoid this, it is necessary to enlarge the through hole, and there is a concern that the rigidity and strength of the opening / closing member may be reduced. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 511 is displaced between the open position and the closed position due to the linear movement in the front-rear direction, the expansion of the through hole 517 is suppressed, and the above-mentioned inconvenience is suitably eliminated. Becomes possible.

Incidentally, in the case of a configuration in which the upper operating port 303 is opened and closed by linear movement in the front-rear direction, it is conceivable that the opening / closing member 511 is not provided with the front wall portion 513. However, in the configuration in which the second guide portion 503 is located in front of the upper operating port 303, the flow direction of the game ball changes due to the contact with the second guide portion 503, and the game ball moves upward even though it is in the closed state. It is assumed that it will jump into the operating port 303. According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the opening / closing member 511 is located at the closed position, the upper operating port 303 is covered with the front wall portion 513, so that unexpected winning due to the diving is suppressed. NS.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, the front surface of the front wall portion 513 is inclined so that the distance from the window panel 62 increases toward the lower side. In this case, when the opening / closing member 511 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, even if the game ball is sandwiched between the front wall portion 513 and the window panel 62, the game ball easily escapes downward. So-called ball biting is suppressed.

In the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the electric accessory 307 is in the closed state, the game ball on the first flow path R1 is the first guide portion 365 and When the electric accessory 307 is guided to the lower operating port 305 by the second guide unit 503 and the electric accessory 307 is in the open state, the game balls on the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 can win a prize in the upper operating port 303. Therefore, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the first guide unit in the winning unit 301 is different from each of the above-described embodiments. The first guide unit 603 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. 50 is a front view of the winning unit 301, FIG. 51 is a perspective view of the winning unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. It is a front view. The same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the winning unit 301 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first guide portion 603 hangs down below the lower end of the translucent portion 341 and is in front of the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position. Extends to. In such a configuration, the portion of the first guide portion 603 located in front of the opening / closing member 331 serves as the second guide portion in each of the above embodiments.

In the first guide portion 603, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), in front of the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position, the confronting portion 605 facing the front opening / closing member 331b so as to be separated from the front surface 331b. Is provided. The confrontation portion 605 is formed in an arc shape that is convex forward, similar to the confrontation portion 453 in the modified example of the second embodiment.

As shown in the enlarged view, the opening / closing member 331 is in the closed position of the upper end portion 605a of the confronting portion 605 (in other words, the lower end portion of the game board 24 side (rear side of the pachinko machine 10) in the first guide portion 603). In the positioned state, it is located above the upper end portion 331d of the opening / closing member 331. Further, the curvature of the confronting portion 605 is substantially the same as the curvature of the locus of one point on the upper end portion 331d of the opening / closing member 331. As a result, interference between the first guide portion 603 and the opening / closing member 331 can be suppressed without providing a notch or the like in the opening / closing member 331.

According to the present embodiment, each guide of the game ball can be made continuous above the opening / closing member 331 and in front of the opening / closing member 331, and the game ball passed between the first and second game nails 281,282. Can be suitably guided to the lower operating port 305. In addition, since the members for each of the above guides are integrally formed, the strength and rigidity of the guide structure in front of the opening / closing member 331 can be increased. Further, the strength and rigidity of the opening / closing member 331 can be increased by making the opening / closing member 331 not provided with a notch or the like.

Further, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, only the opening / closing member 331 is displaced and the first guide portion 603 becomes immobile. Therefore, the first guide portion 603 can be extended forward within a range that does not come into contact with the window panel 62, and the distance from the window panel 62 can be easily made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing in front of the first guide portion 603 in front of the opening / closing member 331, and it is possible to preferably guide the game ball.

Also in the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, when the electric accessory 307 is in the closed state, the game ball on the first flow path R1 is moved to the lower operating port 305 by the first guide unit 603. When the electric accessory 307 is guided and the electric accessory 307 is in the open state, the game balls on the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 can win a prize in the upper operating port 303. Therefore, the same effect as that of each of the above embodiments can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, as in the modified example (FIG. 46) of the second embodiment, the upper end portion 605a of the confronting portion 605 is located below the upper end portion 331d of the opening / closing member 331, and the first The opening / closing member 331 may be provided with an insertion portion (notch or the like) through which the guide portion 603 is inserted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to increase the hanging length of the first guide portion 603. As a result, the distance between the first guide portion 603 and the lower operating port 305 can be easily shortened, and the guidance of the game ball in front of the opening / closing member 331 can be easily stabilized.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 when the support state is the first high winning support state is different from each of the above-described embodiments. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. The same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the variation display time of the game times of the second special figure performed by the second result display unit BS is the result that the game times of the second special figure are out of normal (reach non-occurrence). ), It is configured to be uniformly set to 7 sec. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state according to the present embodiment takes into account the variable display time when the game times of the second special figure correspond to the normal deviation result. It is set. Hereinafter, the opening pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

In the first high winning support state of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed three times from the start to the end of the support state. The first opening is performed until 3 seconds have elapsed, and the remaining two openings are performed until 1 sec has elapsed each time. When the number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 from the start of the support state reaches 10, the support state ends at that point.

The closing period (first waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening is set to 5.5 sec. That is, the period from the start of the first opening to the start of the second opening (the sum of the opening period of the first opening (3 sec) and the first waiting period (5.5 sec)) is set to 8.5 sec. Therefore, it is longer than the variable display time (7 sec) when the game times of the second special figure correspond to the normal deviation result. As a result, the variable display of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize in the upper operating port 303 can be finished before the start of the second opening.

Further, the closing period (second waiting period) between the second opening and the third opening is set to 6.5 sec. That is, the period from the start of the second opening to the start of the third opening (the sum of the opening period of the second opening (1 sec) and the second waiting period (6.5 sec)) is set to 7.5 sec. It is longer than the above-mentioned variable display time (7 sec). As a result, the variable display of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the second prize in the upper operating port 303 can be finished before the start of the third opening.

Next, in the present embodiment, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described.

<Public game state transition process>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing game state transition process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the present embodiment.

In the normal map game state transition process of the present embodiment, similarly to the normal map game state transition process (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment, it is determined in step S1201 whether or not the support state is in progress. If it is not in the supported state, the processes of steps S1202 to S1205 are executed. Then, when it is determined in step S1205 that the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the high frequency support mode, the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is set to "2" in step S1207. "Is set. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode (low frequency support mode), the process proceeds to step S2101, and it is determined whether or not the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high winning support state. do.

When the support state is the first high winning support state, "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S2012. On the other hand, when the support state is not the first high winning support state (low winning support state), "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S2103.

After the processing of step S1207, step S2102 or step S2103 is executed, the processing of steps S1208 and S1209 is sequentially executed to end the state transition processing. If it is determined in step S1201 that the support state is in progress, the process of steps S121 to S1214 is executed in the same manner as the normal drawing game state transition process (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment, and then the process is executed. , Ends this state transition process.

<Opening and closing of accessories>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an accessory opening / closing process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the present embodiment.

In the accessory opening / closing process of the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1301 whether or not the electric accessory 307 is being opened, as in the accessory opening / closing process (FIG. 29) according to the first embodiment. If it is not open, the processes of steps S1302 to S1304 are executed. After executing the accessory release process in step S1304, the setting process for each round is executed in step S1305.

Here, the setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

In the setting process for each round, as in the setting process for each round (FIG. 30) according to the first embodiment, first, in step S1401, the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is set to the high frequency support mode. Determine if it exists. If it is determined that the mode is not the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high winning support state. If it is determined that the first high prize support state is established, the process proceeds to step S2301 and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "3", that is, whether or not it is the first opening. do. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "3", "1500" is set in the second timer area T2 provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S2302, and the upper limit of the first opening is set. Set 3 sec as the period. In the following step S2304, "10" is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, the upper limit of the number of winnings in the upper operating port 303 is set to 10, and the number of winnings is set to 10 for each round. End the setting process.

When it is determined in step S2301 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "3", it means that it is the second or third opening. In this case, in step S2305, "500" is set in the second timer area T2, and 1 sec is set as the upper limit of the opening period. After that, the setting process for each round is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1402 that the support state of the electric accessory 307 is not the first high winning support state, the upper limit of the opening period is set to 0.2 sec in steps S1405 and S1406, and the upper operating port 303. The upper limit of the number of winnings is set to 3 respectively, and the setting process for each round is completed.

Further, when the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is high frequency support in step S1401, it means that the support state is the second high prize support state. Therefore, in steps S1407 to S1409, the second high prize is won. The upper limit of the opening period of the electric accessory 307 in the support state is set to 2 sec, the upper limit of the number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 is set to 10, and the setting process for each round is completed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 56, after the processing of step S2201 is executed, the setting process of the normal figure opening command in step S1306 is executed, and then the accessory opening / closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1301 that the electric accessory 307 is open, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" in step S1313 after executing the processes of steps S1307 to S1312. Determine if it exists. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0", in step S2202, whether or not the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the high frequency support mode, that is, the support state is the second high prize support state. Is determined. In the high frequency support mode, "100" is set in the second timer area T2, and 0.2 sec is set as the standby period.

If the high frequency support mode is not set in step S2202, it means that the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high winning support state. Therefore, in step S2204, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "2". It is determined whether or not it is. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "2", "2750" is set in the second timer area T2 in step S2205, and the first standby period (between the first opening and the second opening) is set. 5.5 sec is set as the waiting period). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2204 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "2", "3250" is set in the second timer area T2 in step S2206, and the second waiting period (second time). 6.5 sec is set as the waiting period between the opening and the third opening).

After executing the process of step S2203, step S2205, or step S2206, the setting process of the normal figure closing command is executed in step S1315, and then the accessory opening / closing process is terminated.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game when the electric accessory 307 is open / closed controlled in the first high winning support state will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Here, it is assumed that the game round of the first special figure is not performed between the start of opening the first electric accessory 307 and the end of the first high winning support state.

In FIG. 58, when a prize is won to the through gate 35 at the timing t21, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection sensor, and this is used as an opportunity to draw a lottery for winning or losing the game and to play the game on the character display unit 44. The start of the variable display of is executed. This variation display is continued for 20 seconds.

Although not shown, even in the present embodiment, if the result of the lottery for winning or failing the drawing is the result of shifting to the first high winning support state, the winning unit 301 starts 3 seconds before the end of the variable display. The special light emitting effect is started in the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 (see FIG. 37 and the like). In addition, the special display effect B1 (character display of "Aim for electric chew !!", etc.) is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 2 seconds before switching to the open state of the electric accessory 307 (such as displaying characters of "Aim for electric chew !!"). See FIG. 40 and the like).

After that, when the first opening is performed by the electric accessory 307 at the timing t22, the first game ball wins the upper operating port 303 at the timing t23 immediately after that, and the second result display unit is accompanied by this. The change display of the game times of the second special figure is started on the BS. In this case, if the result of the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure based on the prize is a normal result, the game times of the second special figure are continued for 7 seconds from the start of the variable display.

Further, while the upper limit period of the first opening of the electric accessory 307 is set to 3 sec, since the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 sec, four games are played following the first game ball. The balls will win in sequence, and a total of 5 game balls will win. With the winning of the second and subsequent game balls, the number of reserved storages in the second special figure (the number of information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit of RAM 204) increases in order, and the number of reserved storages is the fifth. When the game ball of is won, it will be four.

Then, when 3 seconds have passed from the opening of the electric accessory 307 at the timing t24, the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state. This closed state continues until the first waiting period (5.5 sec) elapses.

On the other hand, at the timing t25, when 7 sec elapses from the start of the variation display of the game times of the second special figure, the variation display of the game times ends, and the stop result is displayed over the stop display period of 0.5 sec. NS. When the display of the stop result is completed, at the timing t26, the next game times of the second special figure, that is, the variable display of the game times based on the winning of the second game ball to the upper operating port 303 is started. Along with this, the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is reduced by one to three, and a margin for one is generated with respect to the upper limit number (4).

After that, the first standby period elapses at the timing t27, and the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state again accordingly. Since this second opening is continued for 1 second, one game ball wins the upper operating port 303 at the timing t28 while the electric accessory 307 is in the open state. As a result, the number of reserved storages in the second special figure increases by one, and the upper limit is reached again.

After that, at the timing t29, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is reduced by one as the variable display of the game times of the second special figure based on the third prize is started. Then, when the third opening is started at the timing t30, one game ball wins again (timing t31), and the number of stored information of the second special figure reaches the upper limit.

In addition, in FIG. 58, the case where the game times of the second special figure correspond to the normal deviation result (reach non-occurrence) and the fluctuation display time is 7 sec is illustrated, but the game of the second special figure is illustrated. When the times correspond to the out-of-reach result (reach occurrence), the variation display time is longer than that corresponding to the out-of-order result, and is set to, for example, 12 sec. If the game times corresponding to the winning of the first game ball are out and correspond to the reach result, the game times are completed after the opening of the second electric accessory 307 is completed. Therefore, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is maintained at the upper limit during the second opening, and even if a prize is generated in the upper operating port 303 by the second opening, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is maintained. Cannot be increased. That is, whether or not the number of reserved memories of the second special figure can be increased by the second opening differs depending on the selection mode of the game times of the second special figure. By the way, as the game times of the second special figure, the one corresponding to the normal deviation result is easier to be selected than the one corresponding to the deviation reach result.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the first high winning port state, when a game ball wins in the upper operating port 303 while the first electric accessory 307 is open, the second electric accessory 307 after the end of the game times corresponding to the winning. It was configured to be open.

For example, if a game ball wins a prize in the upper operating port 303 at the first opening, the game times corresponding to the winning will continue until the end of the first high winning port state. From the start to the end of the first high winning port state, no new free area is generated in the holding area Rb (holding area of the second special figure) for the second result display unit of the RAM 204. Therefore, during the transition to the first high winning port state, it is assumed that the player's interest in winning the operating port 303 diminishes after the number of holdings of the second special figure reaches the upper limit. Further, since no new free space is generated in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, at most, the execution amount of the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure based on the first prize and the number of holdings of the second special figure are held. There is also a concern that only the total number of lottery opportunities (5 times) with the maximum number of lottery opportunities can be obtained.

In this regard, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the upper operating port 303 during the opening of the first electric accessory 307, the game corresponding to the winning before the start of the second opening. It becomes possible to end the round and start the next game round. As a result, the second opening can be started after increasing the free area of the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and the upper operating port 303 is motivated to win a prize during the second opening. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in winning the upper operating port 303 throughout the first high winning port state. Furthermore, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity that exceeds the total of the execution amount of the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure based on the first prize and the upper limit number of the reserved number of the second special figure. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to allow many game balls to enter the upper operating port 303 during the first high winning port state is enhanced, and the interest of the first high winning port state is improved.

The opening pattern of the first high winning support state in the low frequency support mode is configured as described above. In the high frequency support mode, the second high prize support state is likely to be repeated at short intervals, so even if the number of winning or failing lottery of the second special figure is small in the first second high prize support state, the shortage will be covered. The player's psychology that it should be supplemented in the next second high prize support state works. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the period from the end of the support state to the occurrence of the next support state tends to be long, and it is difficult to expect replenishment of winning / failing lottery opportunities. Therefore, unlike the case of the high frequency support mode, there is a strong need to acquire more chances of winning or losing lottery in one support state. In this respect, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the first high winning support state in which one set of three times opening of the electric accessory 307 occurs, and it is during the opening of the first electric accessory 307. When a game ball wins a prize in the upper operating port 303, the electric accessory 307 is opened for the second time after the game round corresponding to the prize is completed. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to maximize the chances of winning or losing the lottery of the second special figure, and it is possible to effectively enhance the attractiveness of the first high winning support state.

The period from the start of the first opening to the start of the second opening is longer (8) than the variable display time (including the stop display period. 7.5 sec) of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the normal deviation result. It was set to 5.5 sec), and the first waiting period was set to a period shorter than the fluctuation display time (5.5 sec). In this case, if the game ball wins the upper operating port 303 within 1 sec from the start of the first opening, the game times corresponding to the winning are likely to end before the start of the second opening, and the prize is won after 1 sec has elapsed. In that case, it becomes difficult for the game round corresponding to the winning prize to end before the start of the second opening. That is, the ease of ending the game round before the start of the second opening differs depending on the winning timing of the upper operating port 303. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming for a prize at the early stage of the first opening will be added, and the interest will be improved.

The period from the start of the first opening to the start of the second opening is longer than the variable display time of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the normal deviation result, and the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the deviation reach result. The period was shorter than the variable display time of. In this case, the ease of ending the game before the start of the second opening differs depending on whether the normal out-of-game result or the out-reach result is selected as the game in the second special figure. Will be. Compared to the case where the game round ends before the start of the second opening, the monotonization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, when the game times of the second special figure correspond to the out-of-reach result, it is assumed that the player is paying attention to the reach effect performed on the display screen G, so that the second special figure is shown. Even if it becomes difficult for the number of reserved memories to be vacant (in other words, even if the significance of winning the game ball in the upper operating port 303 diminishes), it is considered that inconvenience in the game production is unlikely to occur.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode of the special display effect performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is different from each of the above-described embodiments. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. The same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as the special display effect, the first special display effect S1 shown in FIG. 59 (a) and the second special display effect S2 shown in FIG. 59 (b) are set. These first and second special display effects S1 and S2 are performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state.

The first special display effect S1 is the same as the special display effect (FIG. 40 (a)) of the first embodiment, and in the effect, at the lower center of the display screen G in the symbol display device 41, A predetermined image such as a character display 381 such as "Aim for electric chew !!" is displayed. On the other hand, the second special display effect S2 is for urging the player to wait or stop the launch of the game ball, and in the effect, "Wait a moment" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen G. A predetermined image such as the character display 701 is displayed. These first and second special display effects S1 and S2 are set to the hold status of the second special figure (information storage status in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 204) at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1. It can be used properly according to the situation.

Next, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 when the support state is the first high winning support state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a).

In the opening pattern of the present embodiment, the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened, the upper limit of the opening period of each time, the opening period and the ending period are the opening patterns of the first high winning support state according to the fifth embodiment. It is the same as FIG. 54). On the other hand, the closing period (first waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening and the waiting period (second waiting period) between the second opening and the third opening are the fifth implementations described above. It is different from the case of the form. Specifically, each of the first and second waiting periods is lengthened by 2 sec.

The relationship between the opening pattern and the special display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b).

From the start of the opening period of the timing t41 to the end of the first opening of the timing t42, the first special display effect S1 is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. As the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state at the timing t42, the execution mode of the special display effect is changed, and the first special display effect S1 is switched to the second special display effect S2.

At the timing t43 2 sec before the start of the second opening, whether to grasp the holding status of the second special figure and switch from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1 according to the grasped result. , Select whether to continue the second special display effect S2 as it is. When the switch to the first special display effect S1 is performed, the switch to the second special display effect S2 is performed again when the second opening is completed at the timing t44.

At the timing t45 2 sec before the start of the third opening, the holding status of the second special figure is grasped in the same manner as described above, and the second special display effect S2 is changed to the first special display effect S1 according to the grasped result. It is selected whether to switch or to continue the second special display effect S2 as it is. After that, with the end of the third opening of the timing t46, the special display effect is ended and the special ending effect B2 (FIG. 40 (a)) is executed.

Next, in the present embodiment, each control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is the same as that of the fifth embodiment.

<Processing during support status>
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the processing during the support state executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. It should be noted that this process is executed in the process during the support state in step S2011 of the support state process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and specifically, the game game just before the game. Is executed when the game result of is the opening result (the result of transition to the support state) and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is being executed.

In the support state processing, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the first high winning support command from the main control device 81 (see step S1110 in FIG. 27) is received. If the first high winning support command has not been received, the processing during the support state is terminated, while if the first high winning support command has been received, in step S2402, the general drawing from the main control device 81 is performed. It is determined whether or not the release command (see step S1306 of FIG. 29) has been received, and whether or not the electric accessory 307 has been switched from the closed state to the open state.

When the normal figure release command is received, that is, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, the round counter SRC2 of various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. This round counter SRC2 is for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened in the first high winning support state.

In the following step S2404, it is determined whether or not the standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The standby flag indicates that the electric accessory 307 is in the standby period. This standby flag is stored in the flag storage area 247 when it is determined that the electric accessory 307 has been switched from the open state to the closed state, and the electric accessory 307 has been switched from the closed state to the open state. When it is found that, it is deleted from the flag storage area 247.

If the wait flag is stored, in step S2405, the wait flag stored in the flag storage area 247 is deleted. After the execution of step S2405, or when a negative determination is made in steps S2402 and S2404, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not the normal diagram closing command (see step S1315 in FIG. 29) has been received from the main controller 81. Then, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 has been switched from the open state to the closed state.

When the normal figure closing command is received, that is, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state, whether or not the value of the round counter SRC2 of the RAM 244 is "3" in step S2407, that is, , It is determined whether or not the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the closed state corresponds to the end of the third (last) opening. If the value of the round counter is not "3" and the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the closed state corresponds to the end of the first or second opening, the first special display effect S1 is executed in step S2408. Determine if it is inside.

When the first special display effect S1 is being executed, a process for performing the second special display effect S2 is executed in step S2409 in order to switch the special display effect to the second special display effect S2. In this step, a command including information on the contents of the second special display effect S2 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the second special display effect S2 from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. .. In the following step S2410, the standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2407 that the value of the round counter SRC2 is "3", that is, when the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the closed state corresponds to the end of the third opening, step S2411 is performed. Then, the value of the round counter SRC2 is cleared to "0".

After the execution of steps S2410 and S2411, or when a negative determination is made in step S2406, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not the standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. If the wait flag is not stored, the process during the support state is terminated, while if the wait flag is stored, the process during the wait period is executed in step S2413 and then the process during the support state is terminated.

Here, the processing during the waiting period in step S2413 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62.

In the process during the waiting period, first, in step S2501, whether or not the value of the round counter SRC2 of the RAM 244 is "1", that is, the first waiting period is between the first opening and the second opening. Determine if it is a waiting period. When the value of the round counter SRC2 is "1" and the first waiting period is in progress, whether or not it is the first specific timing (see FIG. 60B), that is, the second special display effect S2 to the second 1 It is determined whether or not the timing for switching to the special display effect S1 has been reached. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 5.5 seconds have elapsed from the end of the first opening of the electric accessory 307 (in other words, the start of the first standby period).

Here, the MPU 242 measures the elapsed time from the end of the first opening by using the progress counters provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Specifically, the count process of the progress counter is started based on the reception of the normal map closing command, and the count value is incremented (updated) by 1 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). In step S2502, the arrival of the first specific timing is determined with reference to the value of the progress counter.

As a result, if it is determined that the timing is not the first specific timing, the processing is terminated during the waiting period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first specific timing is reached, the number of reserved storages in the second special figure (second start reserved storage number RbN) is grasped in step S2503, and the number is increased to 4 (upper limit number). Determine if it has been reached. In this step, the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is grasped by referring to the second secondary reserved area 250b provided in the reserved storage area 250 (FIG. 32) of the RAM 244.

If the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is not 4, the process for performing the first special display effect S1 is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 in step S2504, and then during the waiting period. End the process. In step S2504, a command including information on the contents of the first special display effect S1 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the first special display effect S1 from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2503 that the number of reserved memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit, the game times of the first special figure are being executed (variable display or stop display) in step S2505. It is judged whether or not it is (middle). In this step, after receiving the special figure variation command for the lower operating port 305 (see step S613 in FIG. 22) from the main control device 81, the special figure variation end command for the lower operating port 305 (step S409 in FIG. 20). Is being received, and it is determined whether or not the game times of the first special figure are being executed.

If the game round of the first special figure is being executed, in step S2506, the remaining change of the first special figure until the end of the change display is based on the information on the change display time included in the command for changing the special figure. Grasp the display time (including the stop display period). On the other hand, if the game times of the first special figure are not being executed, it means that the game times of the second special figure are being executed. Therefore, in step S2507, a command for changing the special figure for the upper operating port 303 Based on the information on the fluctuation display time included in, the remaining fluctuation display time of the second special figure until the end of the fluctuation display is grasped.

After the execution of step S2506 or step S2507, in step S2508, the second is within 3 seconds from the first specific timing, that is, between the first specific timing and the end of the opening period immediately after the first specific timing. It is determined whether or not the game round of the special figure is started. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation period grasped in steps S2506 and S2507 is shorter than 3 sec.

When it is determined in step S2508 that a new game round of the second special figure is started within 3 seconds, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit of four at the first specific timing. This means that during the opening period immediately after that, the number of reserved storages of the second special figure becomes three, and one free area is generated. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2509 to execute the process for performing the first special display effect S1. In this step, the first special display effect S1 is controlled to be executed with a delay of 0.5 sec as compared with the case of step S2504. This leads to a prize in the upper operating port 303, considering that the generation timing of the free area is delayed as compared with the case where the reserved storage number of the second special figure does not reach the upper limit number at the time of the first specific timing. This is to suppress the launch of a game ball that does not stick.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2508 that the game round of the second special figure is not started within 3 seconds, the process is terminated as it is during the waiting period in order to continue the execution of the second special display effect S2.

When it is determined in step S2501 that the value of the round counter SRC2 of the RAM 244 is not "1", it means that the current waiting period is the second waiting period between the second opening and the third opening. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2510, and whether or not the second specific timing (see FIG. 60B) has been reached, that is, whether or not the switching timing from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1 has been reached. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 6.5 sec has elapsed from the end of the second opening of the electric accessory 307 (in other words, the start of the second standby period). If it is determined that the timing is the second specific timing, the process proceeds to the process after step S2503, and if it is determined that the timing is not the second specific timing, the process is terminated during the waiting period.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game when the electric accessory 307 is open / closed controlled in the first high winning support state will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

<Case 1>
As case 1, a case where the number of reserved storages of the second special figure does not reach the upper limit at the first specific timing will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

In the case of FIG. 63, the game round of the first special figure is not executed at the start of the first opening, and the game of the second special figure is immediately generated when the first game ball is won in the upper operating port 303. Times are executed. This game time usually corresponds to the out-of-game result, and the variation display time is set to 7 sec.

At the timing t51, when the opening period related to the first high winning support state is started, the first special display effect S1 is displayed on the display screen G. By visually recognizing the first special display effect S1, the player is urged to shoot the game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307. As a result, as described in the first embodiment, five game balls can win a prize in the upper operating port 303 during the first opening of the electric accessory 307, and the holding memory of the second special figure can be obtained. The number reaches 4 (upper limit).

At the timing t52, when the first opening of the electric accessory 307 is completed and the first standby period is started, the second special display effect S2 is displayed on the display screen G. The player is urged to wait (stop) the launch of the player by visually recognizing the second special display effect S2. As a result, the launch of the game ball in the state where the electric accessory 307 is closed is suppressed.

After that, when the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is completed, the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the second prize is started at the timing t53. Along with this, the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is reduced by one, and one free area is generated in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 204.

Then, at the timing t54 (first specific timing) 2 sec before the second opening of the electric accessory 307, the holding status of the second special figure is grasped. Since the number of reserved storage is not 4, the first special display effect S1 is executed, and the special display effect on the display screen G is switched from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1. By visually recognizing the first special display effect S1, the player is urged to shoot the game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307. As a result, one game ball can win a prize in the upper operating port 303 during the second opening of the electric accessory 307, and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure becomes four again.

At the timing t55, when the second opening of the electric accessory 307 is completed and the second standby period is started, the second special display effect S2 is displayed on the display screen G. Further, when the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the second prize correspond to the normal deviation result and the fluctuation display time is 7 sec, the third prize is corresponded at the timing t56. The game round of the second special figure is started, and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure becomes three.

At the timing t57 (second specific timing) 2 sec before the third opening of the electric accessory 307, the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is grasped. Since the number of reserved memories is not 4, the first special display effect S1 is executed, and the launch of the game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307 is urged. As a result, one game ball can win a prize in the upper operating port 303 during the third opening of the electric accessory 307, and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure becomes four again. As a result, it becomes possible to end the first high prize support state with the hold memory of the second special figure filled up.

<Case 2>
Next, as Case 2, a case where the number of reserved storages of the second special figure reaches the upper limit at the first specific timing will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

When the number of reserved memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit at the first specific timing, the variation display time of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is long, or the electric combination At the start of the first opening of the object 307, the game round of the first special figure is being executed, and it is assumed that the start of the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is delayed. .. FIG. 64 illustrates a case where the game times of the corresponding second special figure in which the first prize is won correspond to the out-of-reach result and the variation display time is set to 12 sec.

At the timing t62 (first specific timing) 2 sec before the second opening of the electric accessory 307, the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is grasped. In the case of FIG. 64, since the game times corresponding to the first winning of the upper operating port 303 are continued for 12 seconds, the period from the start of the first waiting period (timing t61) to the timing t62. In, the game round of the second special figure is not started. Therefore, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four at the start of the first waiting period, it will be four even at the timing t62. Further, in the case of FIG. 64, the game round of the second special figure is not started within 3 seconds from the timing t62, and the second special figure is held until the timing t64 when the second opening of the electric accessory 307 is completed. The state in which the number of reserved memories of is 4 continues.

In this case, the first special display effect S1 is not executed, and the second special display effect S2 is continuously displayed. That is, even if the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 arrives, the first special display effect S1 is not executed. As a result, even when the electric accessory 307 is opened for the second time, it is possible to urge the player to wait for the launch of the game ball in a situation where the number of reserved memories of the second special figure cannot be increased. ..

At the timing t64 (second specific timing) 2 sec before the third opening of the electric accessory 307, since the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is not 4, the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 has arrived. Along with this, the first special display effect S1 is executed.

<Case 3>
Next, as Case 3, another example in which the number of reserved storages of the second special figure reaches the upper limit at the first specific timing will be described with reference to FIG. 65. In FIG. 65, the game round of the first special figure is being executed at the start of the first opening of the electric accessory 307, and the start of the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is delayed. The case is illustrated. It should be noted that the game times of the corresponding second special figure in which the first prize is won correspond to the normal deviation result, and the fluctuation display time is set to 7 sec.

In the case of FIG. 65, since the game times of the first special figure are executed halfway through the first opening period of the electric accessory 307, the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize are The start timing (timing t71) is delayed to the latter half of the opening period. As a result, at the timing t74, which is 1 sec before the second opening of the electric accessory 307, the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the second prize is started.

In this case, at the timing t72 (first specific timing), which is 2 sec before the second opening of the electric accessory 307, the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is 4, but the timing at which the second opening ends from that timing. By t75, the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is reduced by one, and a free area is generated. In this case, since the game round of the second special figure is started within 3 seconds from the first specific timing, the first special display effect S1 is executed. As a result, even if there is no margin in the reserved storage number of the second special figure at the first specific timing, if there is a margin in the reserved storage number of the second special figure by the end of the second opening, the upper operating port 303 is reached. Can be encouraged to win a prize.

Further, the first special display effect S1 in the case of this case is performed at the timing t73 0.5 sec after the first specific timing (execution timing of the first special display effect S1). Compared with the case of FIG. 63, a margin is generated in the reserved storage number of the second special figure. Therefore, by delaying the display timing of the first special display effect S1, there is a margin in the reserved storage number of the second special figure. The launch (consumption) of the game ball is suppressed until the occurrence of.

At the timing t76 (second specific timing) 2 sec before the third opening of the electric accessory 307, since the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is not 4, the execution timing of the original first special display effect S1 At (timing t76), the first special display effect S1 is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A special display effect corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the electric accessory 307 is performed, and the mode of the special display effect can be changed according to the holding status of the second special figure.

Due to the fact that the hit / fail judgment of the second special figure is performed within the range of the upper limit of the number of reserved figures of the second special figure, the electric accessory 307 is opened in order to efficiently enter the game ball into the upper operating port 303. When the number of stored areas Rb for the second result display unit is less than the upper limit, it is desirable to allow the game ball to enter the upper operating port 303, and to refrain from entering the ball in other cases. Become. However, if the player decides to make such a distinction, the player must always pay attention not only to the situation of the electric accessory 307 but also to the number of reserved figures in the second special figure. It tends to be distracting.

In this respect, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a special display effect having a correlation with both the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the open state and the holding status of the second special figure. Therefore, even if the player does not grasp the switching status of the electric accessory 307 and the holding status of the second special figure, the player can proceed with the game with reference to the special display effect, based on those situations. You can play the game naturally. As a result, distraction is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the concentration on the game. In addition, the degree of attention to the special display effect can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As a special display effect, the first special display effect S1 in a mode that suggests to the player that the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state or urges the player to aim at the electric accessory 307, and the game. The second special display effect S2, which urges the player to wait for the game or stop firing the game ball, is set, and these effects are used properly. As a result, the launching operation of the player can be assisted by the special display effect, and it becomes easy to perform the game suitable for each situation of the electric accessory 307 and the holding status of the second special figure.

The execution timing of the first special display effect S1 is set before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state. As a result, the player can grasp the first special display effect S1 in advance, and can launch the game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307 at an appropriate timing. Then, the holding status of the second special figure at the execution timing is grasped, and the execution / non-execution of the first special display effect S1 is switched based on the grasped result. In this case, it is possible to perform a notification that reflects the latest hold status, and it is possible to increase the reliability and the degree of interest in the special display effect.

A special display effect is provided during the waiting period (opening period, first waiting period, second waiting period) immediately before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state. As a result, the special display effect can be utilized as one effect during the first high winning support state, and it is possible to perform notification according to the execution mode of the latest open state.

Even if the number of reserved storages of the second special figure reaches the upper limit at the execution timing (first specific timing, second specific timing) of the first special display effect S1, by the time the switching control of the electric accessory 307 is completed. When the number of reserved memories of the second special figure decreases, the first special display effect S1 is executed. As a result, even if there is no margin in the holding status of the second special figure at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1, if there is a margin before the switching control is completed, the notification is performed based on that. Can be done. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably assist the efficient entry of the ball into the upper operating port 303, and the interest is improved.

The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, when the electric accessory 307 is closed, it is not possible to win a prize in the upper operating port 303, but it may be a configuration in which it is difficult to win a prize. For example, the opening / closing members 331 and 511 may be configured to be half-opened without completely closing the upper operating port 303. In short, it suffices if the ease of winning a prize in the upper operating port 303 differs between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, as a "variable receiving means", an electric accessory that a plate-shaped opening / closing member 331 stands up at a closed position and is displaced to an open position by rotating forward from the closed position. 307 is provided, but other configurations such as a side-opening type and a front-rear slide type may be used. That is, the configuration of the electric accessory is arbitrary as long as the receiving region can be formed on the first flow path R1 when the open state is switched.

The side-opening type electric accessory has a protruding portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and has an opening as a ball entry portion, and an axis that is provided in the protruding portion and intersects the game board. A movable blade as a movable body that rotates as a center is provided, and the degree of opening of the opening is changed by rotating the movable blade, and an open state (a first that can accept or easily accepts a game ball in the ball entry portion). A state) and a closed state (a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state) can be mentioned. In this configuration, the game ball often cannot flow down or is difficult to flow down in front of the electric accessory (protruding portion). Therefore, when the movable blades are located in the closed position in the front view from the front of the game machine. , The entire electric accessory including the movable blade and the protruding portion is retracted from the first flow path R1, and when the movable blade is displaced to the open position, only the movable blade intersects the first flow path R1. It is good to do it.

Further, the front-rear slide type electric accessory includes a protrusion having an opening as a ball-entry portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and opens upward, and a movable plate as a movable body that can move forward and backward. , And the movable plate recedes from the forward position that covers the opening from above to the receding position where the area that covers the opening decreases to expand the degree of opening, thereby forming a receiving region and closing (entering). There is a case where the ball portion is switched from the open state (the first state in which the game ball can be accepted in the ball portion or is easier to accept than the second state) from the open state (the second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted or is difficult to accept in the ball portion). In this configuration, it is preferable that the receiving region is formed on the first flow path R1 when viewed from above.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the electric accessory 307 and the lower operating port 305 are arranged vertically, but the arrangement direction of these may be oblique. As long as the electric accessory 307 is located upstream of the lower operating port 305 and the receiving region RA is formed on the first flow path R1, these arrangement directions are arbitrary.

(4) The left-right width of the opening / closing member 331 (the size of the receiving area RA) was made larger than the left-right width of the lower working opening 305 (the size of the lower working opening 305) as the length of about three game balls. A configuration may be configured in which both are equalized so that only the game ball flowing down the first flow-down path can win a prize in the upper operating port 303.

In a configuration in which a game ball flowing down a flow path other than the first flow path R1 can also win a prize in the upper operating port 303, the left-right width of the opening / closing member 331 is at least twice the left-right width of the lower operating port 305. It is preferably 5 times or less. By doubling or more, game balls other than the game balls on the first flow path R1 can be included in the winning target for the upper operating port 303. In addition, the following effects can be expected by setting the value to 5 times or less. If the size exceeds 5 times, it becomes too easy to win a prize in the upper operating port 303, and as a result, due to the specifications of the gaming machine, the frequency of switching to the open state has to be reduced. In this respect, with the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately limit the winning of the upper operating port 303, and it is possible to ensure an appropriate frequency of switching to the open state. Furthermore, as a result of the increase in the occupancy ratio in the game area, there is a possibility that restrictions on the flow area of the game ball and the installation area of other game parts may be strengthened. It can be configured.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state, the game balls flowing down the second and third flow-down paths R2 and R3 do not win the lower operating port 305. However, it may be configured so that a prize can be won. In this case, it is preferable that the structure is such that it is harder to win a prize than the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1.

(6) In the third embodiment, the opening / closing member 511 is configured to linearly move back and forth, but as in the other embodiments, the closing position is formed by rotating forward about the rotation axis. It may be configured to be displaced from the open position. In this case, the second guide portion 503 through which the through hole 517 is inserted may be curved so as to form a convex arc shape forward (when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation axis) in a side view. As a result, the interference between the opening / closing member 511 and the second guide portion 503 can be alleviated, the through hole 517 can be miniaturized, and the rigidity and strength of the opening / closing member 511 can be increased.

In such a configuration, the first guide portion 365 may be hung down to the front of the opening / closing member 511, and the lower end portion thereof may have an arc shape similar to that of the second guide portion 503. That is, by making the first guide unit 365 have the same configuration as the first guide unit 603 according to the fourth embodiment, the distance between the first guide unit 365 and the second guide unit 503 (distance in FIG. 7). (Refer to L6) can be easily contracted, and the game ball can be prevented from spilling outward from between the guide portions 365 and 503.

Further, in the embodiment other than the third embodiment, the opening / closing member 331 may be configured to linearly move back and forth.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, a pair of left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451 and 503 are provided as "regulating means" or "guidance means", but a configuration may be provided in which only one of these is provided. However, in consideration of the suitable flow direction of the game ball and the guidance of the game ball, it is preferable to use the configuration of each of the above embodiments. This also applies to the first guide units 365 and 603.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the first guide portions 365 and 603 are configured by continuous walls extending in the guide direction, but all or a part of the first guide portion may be configured by a plurality of game nails. In this case, the plurality of game nails may be arranged in the guiding direction so that the distance between them is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. According to this configuration, in the process of guiding the game ball, the flow speed of the game ball is likely to be decelerated due to the contact of the game ball with the game nail, and the period until the game ball reaches the lower operating port 305 or the receiving area RA is increased. It becomes easy to prolong the period. As a result, the visibility of the movement of the game ball is enhanced, and it becomes easier to perform the production utilizing the above period, and the interest is improved.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451 and 503 and the first guide portion 603 have the same length (vertical width). It may be different. In this case, the flow direction of the game ball may be changed by bending the second guide portion 371, 403, 451, 503 and the first guide portion 603 on the long side from an intermediate position. This also applies to the first guide unit 365.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451 and 503 and the first guide portion 603 have the same protrusion amount, but the protrusion amounts may be different. good. This also applies to the first guide unit 365.

(11) In the first embodiment, the second guide portion 371 is integrally formed with the opening / closing member 331, and in the second and third embodiments, the second guide portions 403, 451 and 503 guide the upper side. Although it is integrally formed with the passage 333, the second guide portion may be formed separately from the opening / closing member 331 and the upper guide passage 333, and may be connected to them by using an engaging portion or a fastener. In this case, when the second guide portion is damaged, for example, a part of the second guide portion is lost due to the impact from the game ball, it is sufficient to replace the second guide portion, and the repair becomes easy. However, considering the number of parts and the assembling workability at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine, it is preferable to use the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(12) In the first embodiment, when the opening / closing member 331 is displaced to the open position, a part or all of the second guide portion 371 may be accommodated (entered) in the lower operating port 305. .. In this case, the restriction on the degree of opening of the opening / closing member 331 can be relaxed, and the opening / closing member 331 can be opened greatly easily. Further, the distance between the opening / closing member 331 and the lower operating port case 337 can be shortened, and the two can be brought closer to each other.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the distance between the left and right second guide portions 371 is made larger than the left and right width of the lower operating port case 337 and the opening / closing member 331 is displaced to the open position, each second guide is provided. The portion 371 may be configured to enter the left and right outer sides of the lower operating port case 337. Also with this configuration, the restriction on the degree of opening of the opening / closing member 331 can be relaxed, and the opening / closing member 331 can be opened greatly easily. Further, the distance between the opening / closing member 331 and the lower operating port case 337 can be shortened, and the two can be brought closer to each other.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the game nail is not provided between the opening / closing member 331, 511 and the lower operating port case 337, but the game nail may be provided. In this case, in the first embodiment, when the opening / closing member 331 is displaced to the open position, the two game nails may be arranged side by side in the left-right direction so that the left and right second guide portions 371 fit between them. .. In this case, if the game nails are bent too much in a direction in which they approach each other, it interferes with the second guide portion 371 and it becomes difficult to properly operate the opening / closing member 331. Therefore, extreme nail bending is suppressed. .. The game nails may be provided so that both of them fit between the left and right second guide portions 371.

(14) In the first embodiment, the second guide portion 371 is formed by a continuous wall extending in the guide direction, but all or a part of the second guide portion may be formed by a plurality of game nails. In this case, the plurality of game nails may be arranged in the guiding direction so that the distance between them is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. In such a configuration, the game nail may be integrally formed with the opening / closing member 331 made of synthetic resin (the same material as the opening / closing member 331).

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position is substantially flush with the front surface 320b of the base body 320, but the configuration is such that the front surface 320b is located behind the front surface 320b. May be good. Even in this case, when the game ball passes in front of the opening / closing member 331, it is prevented from being caught by the opening / closing member 331, causing the flow of the game ball to be stagnant or the opening / closing member 331 being damaged.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the translucent unit 341 of the first light emitting unit 311 is provided with a first region provided with the first guide unit 365,603 and a first guide unit 365,603. Although the light emitting mode is shared with that of the second region, the light emitting mode of each region may be different. That is, since the game ball cannot or is difficult to flow in front of the first guide units 365 and 603, the light emitting mode of the first region may be the same as that of the second light emitting unit 317. In this case, it is preferable to provide a light-shielding member behind the translucent portion 341 to prevent the light of the light emitting body that emits light in the first region from entering the second region.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the second light emitting unit 317 is configured to project forward, but it may be configured not to project. In this case, the second light emitting unit 317 is configured so that the front surface thereof is substantially flush with the base body 320, and the game flow is in front of the second light emitting unit 317, similarly to the light transmitting unit 341 of the first light emitting unit 311. Can be configured to flow down.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the light emitting modes of the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 are different depending on the light emitting control of the light emitting substrate 359, but the light emitting modes may be different depending on the specifications of the light emitting body. For example, as the light emitting body for the second light emitting unit 317, a light emitting body capable of emitting higher brightness than the light emitting body for the first light emitting unit 311 is arranged, and the type of the light emitting body is different in each light emitting unit. The light emitting mode may be different.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the flow speed of the game ball may be different between the front of the first light emitting unit 311 and the front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511. Specifically, the flow speed of the game ball may be faster when the game ball flows down in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511 than in front of the first light emitting unit 311. For example, a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball may be provided in front of the first light emitting unit 311 while the deceleration means may not be provided in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511.

In the configuration in which the game ball flows down in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511, if the flow of the game ball stagnates in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511, the game ball hinders the displacement of the opening / closing members 331 and 511 to the open position. There is a risk of being displaced. Therefore, by allowing the game ball to quickly pass in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511, the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed. On the other hand, by slowing the flow of the game ball above the opening / closing members 331 and 511, the player can easily see the flow of the game ball toward the electric accessory 307 (upper operating port 303), and the electric accessory 307 It is possible to effectively fuel the expectation that the upstream game ball will enter the upper operating port 303.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of flow paths (first to third flow paths R1 to R3) that allow the game ball to win a prize in the upper operating port 303 are adjacent to each other, but the flow processes are dispersed. The routes may be separated from each other. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means (first light emitting unit 311) for performing specific notification on each route. However, when there are three or more flow paths, it is not always necessary to provide the notification means corresponding to all the flow paths, and it is sufficient to provide the notification means on at least two routes.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball guided downward by the first guide portions 365, 603 above the opening / closing members 331, 511 (electric accessory 307) is guided by the opening / closing members 331, 511. In the front, the same guidance is made downward, but a changing means for changing the flow direction of the game ball to the left and right is provided in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511, and the game is played in front of the members 331 and 511. It may be configured to change the flow direction of the sphere. As a result, the front region of the electric accessory 307 can be utilized as a change region for changing the flow direction of the game ball. In this case, the movement of the game ball can be diversified as compared with the configuration in which the game ball merely flows down in front of the electric accessory 307, and the interest is improved.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the gaming ball is configured to flow down in front of the first light emitting unit 311 (transmissive unit 341) as the "notifying means", but the notifying means switches the electric accessory 307. It is possible to display a specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of control, the game ball is configured to flow down behind the specific notification, and light transmission is possible so that the rear of the notification means can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. It may be configured to have (transparency). In this case, as the notification means, for example, an edge light type transmissive display using a light guide plate (light is emitted from the end surface of the light guide plate having predetermined irregularities (grooves) formed on the front surface or the rear surface, and the light is emitted. Is reflected or refracted by the unevenness to irradiate light forward to display a predetermined light emission on the light guide plate), a transmissive liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel), or the like can be used. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, and the same effect as that of each of the above-described embodiments can be expected.

Further, in the above configuration, the game ball may flow down not only behind the notification means but also in front of the notification means. Since the space in the front-rear direction can be effectively used, the flow-down area can be substantially expanded. In this case, for example, a case where the game ball flows down in front of the notification means and a case where the game ball flows down after the distribution means for distributing the game ball to the front side and the rear side is provided upstream of the notification means. Therefore, the ease of winning a prize in the upper operating port 303 (the ease of being picked up by the electric accessory 307) may be different. As a result, a playability is added in which the player enjoys whether to pass in front of or behind the notification means, and the interest is improved.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the electric accessory 307 is provided as the "variable receiving means", but the "variable receiving means" is not limited to the one that opens and closes the upper operating port (lottery port of the second special figure) 303. , Other entry openings such as the large winning opening 32a and the general winning opening 31 may be opened and closed. For example, when the variable winning device 32 that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a is used as the "variable receiving means", the variable winning device 32 is arranged upstream of the lower operating port 305, and the receiving area is on the first flow path R1. It is preferable that the structure is formed. In this case, when the variable winning device 32 is switched to the open state in the open / close execution mode, it is suppressed that the winning of the large winning opening 32a is hindered by the lower operating opening 305.

In addition, in the configuration in which the electric accessory that opens and closes other entrances such as the large winning opening 32a and the general winning opening 31 is used as the "variable receiving means", the "ball entry portion" on the downstream side is shown in the first special figure. The lottery opening is not limited to the lottery opening, and other entrances such as a through gate 35, a general winning opening 31, and a lottery opening of the second special drawing may be used. In this case, the "ball entry portion" on the downstream side is not limited to the one not provided with the electric accessory, and may be provided with the electric accessory.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the lower operating port 305 is provided as the "ball entry portion" on the downstream side, but the "ball entry portion" is not limited to the lottery opening of the first special drawing, and is limited to the through gate 35 and the general. It may be another entry opening such as a winning opening 31. Further, the "ball-entry portion" on the downstream side may be a large winning opening 32a and may be provided with an electric accessory (variable winning device 32).

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the pass / fail judgment of the first special figure is made based on the winning of the lower operating port 305, and the winning / failing of the second special figure is made based on the winning of the upper operating port 303. However, a common winning / failing determination may be made regardless of which of the two operating ports 303 and 305 wins the game ball. In this case, the configuration may include only one type of special symbol, or in the configuration including the first and second special symbols, both of the actuating ports 303 and 305 may correspond to one of the special symbols.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, it is more advantageous for the player to win the upper operating port 303 than to win the lower operating port 305, but the advantages of the respective operating ports 303 and 305 are equal. It may be reversed or it may be reversed. However, in order to increase the expectation for winning the upper operating port 303 and enhance the attractiveness of the first high winning support state, it is preferable to use the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, the ease of selection of the 15R jackpot (ratio of the 15R jackpot) in the case of a jackpot is different between the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 (see FIG. 15). The upper operating port 303 is more advantageous to the player than the lower operating port 305, but after equalizing the ease of selection of the 15R jackpot and the breakdown (privilege) of the jackpot type, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By making the transition rate to the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode (transition rate to the advantageous state) different, the superiority of the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 may be different. In addition, the upper operating port 303 is more advantageous than the lower operating port 305 in terms of the ease of selection of the 15R jackpot and the breakdown of the jackpot type, and the upper operating port 303 is also more advantageous in the transition rate to the above advantageous state. It may be configured as.

(28) In each of the above-described embodiments, when any of the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 wins a prize, a special figure winning / failing determination is performed using a common winning / failing table (FIGS. 14A and 14B). Although it is configured, a winning / failing table for the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 may be provided separately, and the value of the random number for winning the big hit may be different between the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot may be the same or different between the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially targeted for the hit / fail judgment over the hold information of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. , And vice versa, and the winning / failing may be determined in the order of winning (acquisition order). However, in view of the superiority of the upper operating port 303 in the type table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 15B), it is preferable to use the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 81 controls the switching of the electric accessory 307, but other control devices (effect control device 82, display control device 212, payout control device 97, etc.) May be the configuration performed by.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 303, and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), but the hold information is stored. It may be configured not to be used. In this way, the configuration can be simplified. This also applies to each prize in the lower operating port 305 and the through gate 35.

(32) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 is stored up to 4 pieces, but it may be less than 4 pieces, or 5 pieces or more. You may. In this case, the upper limit of the opening period of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state (the opening period of the first opening when there are a plurality of openings) can be set according to the upper limit number of holdings. Specifically, it is preferable to set the period to be the product of the added value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number and 0.6 sec, which is the firing cycle of the game ball. Further, the upper limit of the number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 in the first high winning support state can also be set according to the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces. Specifically, it may be an added value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number.

The upper limit of the number of reserved information stored in the lower operating port 305 and the through gate 35 based on each winning may be less than 4 or 5 or more. Further, the upper limit number of stored information based on the winning of the operating ports 303, 305 and the through gate 35 may be different.

(33) In each of the above embodiments, the first and second light emitting units 311, 317 start the special light emitting effect 3 sec before the opening start, but the execution timing of the special light emitting effect is the electric accessory 307. The specific timing may be arbitrary as long as it is before the opening of. For example, the period from the start of the special light emission effect to the start of opening of the electric accessory 307 may be shorter than the required period from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the electric accessory 307. In this case, even if the game ball is fired after seeing the special light emission effect, it becomes difficult to win the game ball in the upper operating port 303 at the optimum timing for reaching the upper limit of the number of reserved memories in the second special figure. It becomes possible to suppress aiming. This also applies to the special display effect, and the execution timing of the special display effect may be before the opening of the electric accessory 307, and is not limited to 2 sec before the opening of the electric accessory 307.

(34) In each of the above embodiments, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the transition to the support state by the first high winning support state occurs, but the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the first high winning support state occurs. In this case, only the first high prize support state may be set as the support state for the high frequency support mode, or a plurality of support states having different ease of winning may be set. Further, the configuration may be such that the first high winning support state occurs only in the high frequency support mode. However, considering that the high frequency support mode is in a state where it is easy to expect a prize in the upper operating port 303 in the first place, in order to enhance the attractiveness of the first high prize support state, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is adopted. Is preferable.

(35) In each of the above embodiments, the specific light emitting effect is a dedicated effect in the first high winning support state, but it may be feasible even when the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed in the second high winning support state. good. In this case, the first high prize support state is more likely to perform the specific light emission effect than the second high prize support state, that is, priority is given when the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high prize support state. The configuration may be such that a specific light emission effect is performed. This also applies to the specific display effect. However, from the viewpoint of highlighting the first high winning support state and suppressing the confusion of the player, it is preferable to use the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

In addition, in a configuration in which the first high winning support state can occur not only in the low frequency support mode but also in the high frequency support mode, it is specified only when the first high winning support state occurs in the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to perform a light emitting effect or a specific display effect, or may be configured to perform a specific light emitting effect or a specific display effect in response to the occurrence of the first high winning support state regardless of the difference in the support mode. In addition, in the configuration in which the specific light emission effect and the specific display effect are performed in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the occurrence of the first high winning support state in the low frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode. It should be easier to perform than the occurrence of the first high winning support state.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, an upper limit of the number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 at the time of transition to the support state and an upper limit of the opening period of each time are set, and any of these conditions is satisfied. Although the support state is terminated or the electric accessory 307 is switched from the open state to the closed state, only one of the above conditions may be set.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, on the premise that there are four pending information based on the winning of the upper operating port 303, the opening period of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state (opening a plurality of times). If there is, the upper limit of the opening period of the first opening) is set to 3 sec, but it may be a period of less than 3 sec because it is sufficient if the invalid prize seen in relation to the winning / failing judgment of the second special figure can be suppressed. In this case, it is preferable that the period is 0.6 sec or more, which is the firing cycle of the game ball, so that at least one prize can be expected.

In addition, when the configuration is such that the number of reserved storages in the second special figure reaches the upper limit while suppressing invalid winning, the opening period of the electric accessory 307 may be 3 sec or more and 3.6 sec or less. preferable. That is, the lower limit value is a value obtained by multiplying the total number (5 pieces) of the execution amount of the game times of the second special figure and the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the second special figure by the firing cycle of the game ball, and set the lower limit value. It is advisable to set the added value obtained by adding the above firing cycles as the upper limit value.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, the first light emitting unit 311 is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, but the detection sensor for the upper operating port 303 or the upper operating port 303 (of the game ball). It may be provided on the flow path (movement path) to the sensor) that detects the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 303 by detecting the passage. In this case, the light emitting means as the first light emitting unit 311 is provided in the electric accessory 307 to integrate the two, or the light emitting means is provided inside the upper operating port 303 (behind the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position). It is good to do it. In the latter, for example, the opening / closing member 331 and the electric accessory 307 as a whole or a portion overlapping the light emitting means when viewed from the front has a transparency (translucency), and the light from the light emitting means is the opening / closing member 331 or the electric light emitting means. It is preferable that the configuration is such that it can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the accessory 307.

(39) In the first embodiment, assuming that there are four pending information based on the winning of the upper operating port 303, the upper limit number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 in the first high winning support state is set. Although the number is set to 5, it may be less than 5 because it is sufficient if the invalid prizes seen in relation to the winning / failing judgment of the second special figure can be suppressed.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information (open random number counter C4 and open type counter C5) of the normal figure stored in the electric service holding area 233 or the sub-side electric service holding area 250c is commonly used. The figure may be configured to include a destination identification means for specifying at a timing earlier than the target of the hit / fail determination, and to perform a special display effect based on the identification result of the destination identification means. In this case, it is possible to secure a long notification period for the special display effect while starting the special display effect before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize the special display effect, and to diversify the mode of the special display effect to enhance the effect. However, from the viewpoint of simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load, it is preferable to use the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(41) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the relationship between the electric accessory 307 and the lower operating port 305 is such that when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, the receiving area RA becomes the lower operating port. It does not have to be formed on the flow path (first flow path R1) of the game ball to 305. For example, the winning opening (starting winning opening of the first special drawing) corresponding to the lower operating opening 305 may be arranged upstream (upper) of the electric accessory 307.

(42) In the fifth embodiment, the variation display time of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the normal deviation result is fixed to 7 sec, but a plurality of variation display times having different lengths are set. You may. In such a configuration, the length of the first waiting period may be set in consideration of the difference in the variable display time. For example, 7 sec and 4 sec may be set, and then the first waiting period may be 2.5 sec. In this case, if 4 sec is selected as the variation display time of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize, the variation display of the game times is likely to end before the start of the second opening of the electric accessory 307. On the contrary, if 7 sec is selected, it becomes difficult to finish. As a result, even if the same normal deviation result is obtained, it is possible to cause a case where a free area is formed in the holding status of the second special figure and a case where the free area is not formed. In such a configuration, the selection probabilities of the 7 sec variable display time and the 4 sec variable display time may be equal or different. Further, when the selection probabilities of the two are different, the latter may be higher than the former, and vice versa.

Further, the variation display time of the game times may be changed according to the holding status of the second special figure. For example, when the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is less than 3, the variation display time of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the normal deviation result is set to 7 sec, and when it is 3 or more, it is set. The variable display time can be set to 4 sec. In this case, if the first waiting period is 2.5 sec, the fluctuation display of the game times ends before the start of the second opening only when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 3 or more. It can be made easier. As a result, the fun of having three or more game balls win the upper operating port 303 in the first opening is added, and the fun is improved.

(43) In the fifth embodiment, the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize can be completed before the second opening of the electric accessory 307, but the third time. It may be configured so that it can be terminated before opening. That is, the configuration may be such that the new hold information of the second special figure can be held by performing the third opening. This also applies to the sixth embodiment.

(44) In the fifth embodiment, the first waiting period is set to a period (5.5 sec) shorter than the variation display time (7 sec) of the game times of the second special figure, but the second special figure shows. It may be set to a period longer than the variable display time of the game times. In this case, if a game ball wins a prize in the upper operating port 303 during the first opening of the electric accessory 307, and if the game round corresponding to the winning is started before the end of the first opening, the said It is possible to reliably end the game round before the start of the second opening. As a result, an empty area is likely to be formed in the holding area of the second special figure at the time of opening the second opening. Further, the second waiting period (6.5 sec) may be set to a period longer than the variable display time of the game times of the second special figure in the same manner as described above.

(45) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the opening period of the first opening is made longer than the opening period of the second opening, but the lengths of these open memories may be the same, and the length may be the same. May be reversed. This also applies to the relationship between the second opening and the third opening, or the relationship between the first opening and the third opening. However, considering that the number of reserved memories of the second special figure can be easily stored at an early stage of the first high winning support state and the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

Further, in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the opening period of the first opening is set to be the longest, but the opening period of the second opening or the third opening may be the longest. However, considering that the number of reserved memories of the second special figure can be easily stored at an early stage of the first high winning support state and the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(46) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303, and the lower operating port 305 are provided in the lower region PE4, and the game ball is launched so as to flow down either the left region PE2 or the right region PE3. Even if it is allowed to do so, both operating ports 303 and 305 are configured to be able to win a prize, but they may be arranged so that they can be separated. That is, for example, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303, and the lower operating port 305 are provided on one of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. In this way, when the game ball is launched so as to flow down the area on the side where the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 are provided, the respective operating ports 303 and 305 can be won. It becomes a composition. In this case, the operating port corresponding to the first special drawing or the second special drawing is provided separately from both operating ports 303 and 305, and the operating port is opposite to the area on the side where both operating ports 303 and 305 are provided. It is preferable to provide it in the area on the side.

In the sixth embodiment, when both operating ports 303 and 305 are provided on one of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, both operating ports 303 and 305 are provided in place of or in addition to the first special display effect S1. The notification of the mode suggesting that the game ball should flow down may be performed in the area on the side where the game ball is provided. For example, when both operating ports 303 and 305 are provided in the right side region PE3, right notification can be performed. As a result, it is possible to support the launching operation of the player, and it becomes easy to perform a game suitable for the switching status of the electric accessory 307 and the holding status of the second special figure.

(47) In the sixth embodiment, the second special display effect S2 is performed only when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is the upper limit or the upper limit, but the second special figure is used. Even if the number of reserved storages in the figure is not the upper limit, the second special display effect S2 may be performed. For example, the second special display effect S2 may be performed not only when the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is four (upper limit number) but also when the number is three. That is, when the reward (privilege) is small, such as when the prize is limited to one, the first special display effect S1 may not be executed.

(48) In the sixth embodiment, when the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is the upper limit at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1, the next opening of the electric accessory 307 is completed. The second special display effect S2 may be displayed regardless of whether or not the number of reserved storages is reduced by the time.

(49) In the sixth embodiment, the second special display effect S2 may not be displayed and the special display effect may not be executed during the display period of the second special display effect S2.

(50) In the sixth embodiment, the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is the upper limit at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1, and the next opening of the electric accessory 307 is completed. When the number of reserved storages does not decrease by the time, the holding status of the first special figure may be grasped. On top of that, if there is a free area in the reserved area of the first special figure, "Aim for the navel chucker !!" is displayed as a special display effect, and if it does not exist, the second special display effect S2 is displayed. It may be configured to perform. Here, "navel chucker" is a common name for the lower operating port 305, and the above display can urge the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the lower operating port 305. As a result, it is possible to support the winning of the lower operating port 305 by utilizing the waiting period, and the interest of the first high winning support state is improved.

(51) In the sixth embodiment, when the first special display effect S1 is executed, the remaining hold up to the upper limit storage number of the second special figure is held in place of or in addition to the first special display effect S1. Notification according to the number (for example, display such as "Let the electric chew win ○ pieces !!") may be performed. As a result, even if the player concentrates on the special display effect, the game can be advanced while grasping the remaining number up to the upper limit storage number of the second special figure.

(52) In the sixth embodiment, whether to execute the first special display effect S1 when the execution condition of the first special display effect S1 is satisfied in relation to the holding status of the second special figure. A lottery means for drawing whether or not to make a lottery may be provided, and the first special display effect S1 may be randomly executed. As a result, the execution frequency of the first special display effect S1 is reduced, and excessive assistance is suppressed.

(53) In the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls when a game ball wins in the upper operating port 303 may be less than four. Specifically, it is preferable that the number of game balls (1) or less that can be fired during the opening period (1 sec) of the second opening of the electric accessory 307. In such a configuration, when the second opening is performed while the reserved storage number of the second special figure has reached the upper limit number, even if the game ball is won in the upper operating port 303, a payout larger than the number of shots is obtained. It is not possible to do so, and the significance of refraining from launching game balls increases. As a result, the player's interest in the second special display effect S2 increases, and the degree of attention to the special display effect increases.

(54) In the sixth embodiment, the holding status of the second special figure (in some cases, the holding status of the first special figure, or the holding of the first and second special figures in the configuration described in (50) above). The execution mode of the first and second special display effects S1 and S2 is changed according to the situation), but instead of or in addition to this, the execution mode of the special light emission effect (see FIG. 37) is changed. It may be configured. For example, if there is a vacancy or no vacancy in the hold status of the second special figure, the special light emission effect is executed at each specific timing, while if there is no vacancy or no vacancy in the hold status of the second special figure, the first and The second light emitting units 311, 317 can be turned off to disable the special light emitting effect, or the light emitting intensity can be weakened to keep the degree of execution low.

In this case, the closing period (standby period) of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state may be configured such that the special light emitting effect is not executed. According to this, when the special light emission effect is not executed at a specific timing due to the fact that there is no space in the hold status of the second special figure, the execution status of the special light emission effect during the standby period is maintained as it is. The control process can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced, and the player's confusion can be suppressed by frequently changing the light emitting states of the first and second light emitting units 311, 317. can.

Further, for example, when the transition to the first high prize support state occurs in the high prize support mode, at the time of the first opening (at the start of opening or during the opening period) of the electric accessory 307 in the first high prize support state. If there is no vacancy or no vacancy in the hold status of the second special figure, a special light emission effect in advance (special light emission effect for 3 seconds before the transition to the support state of the electric accessory 307 (see A2 and A3 in FIG. 37)) , The configuration may be such that the special light emission effect is not performed during the opening period and the first opening period.

(55) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

In addition, the invention described in each of the following feature groups states, "For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a ball entry portion capable of entering a game ball and a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the entry portion. There is known one provided with a variable receiving means capable of switching between a first state and a second state in which a gaming ball is unacceptable or difficult to accept (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). The background technology of "." Was made with the problem that the invention of "there is still room for improvement in improving the interest" is to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 305) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A first information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81) to acquire the first information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion.
A first determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81) that makes a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means.
A second ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) to acquire the second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion.
A second determination means (a function of the main control device 81 to execute a hit / fail determination process for the upper operating port 303) that makes a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means.
A first state (open state) in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the second ball entry portion provided in the game area, and a game ball cannot be accepted in the second ball entry portion or more than in the first state. A variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to a second state (closed state) that is difficult to accept, and
A variable control means (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, and
With
When the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state, the variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (accepting area RA) capable of receiving the game ball, and the game is received in the predetermined receiving area. It is configured to accept the ball into the second ball entry section.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined receiving region is formed on a flow path (first flow path R1) of a game ball to the first ball entry portion in the game area.

In the above configuration, the first determination is made based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and the second determination is made based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion. Under such a configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, the result of the game ball entering the first ball entry section even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It may be difficult to enter the second ball entry section. That is, the opportunity to receive the second determination is deprived, and the inconvenience that the player cannot properly enjoy the profit in the first state may occur.

In this respect, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, a predetermined receiving region is formed by the variable receiving means on the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion. Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the first ball entry section reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first ball entry section, and the reception of the game ball is hindered by the first ball entry section. It is suppressed. As a result, the opportunity to receive the second judgment is stably secured, and the player can properly enjoy the profit in the first state.

Feature A2. The variable receiving means has a movable body (opening / closing member 331, 511) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position, and is movable. It is configured so that the body can be switched from the second state to the first state by displacing the body from the second position to the first position.
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the movable body is configured to be located on a flow path of a gaming ball to the first entry portion when it is located at the first position. ..

According to the above configuration, the movable body for switching the state of the variable receiving means can function as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing in the flow path toward the first entering ball portion. As a result, the game ball can be guided to the second ball entry section at an intermediate position of the flow path, and the game ball heading for the first ball entry section can be suitably entered into the second ball entry section. ..

Feature A3. The movable body is characterized in that it can be retracted from the flow path of the game ball to the first entry portion when the movable body is displaced from the first position to the second position. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the second state, the flow of the game ball to the first ball entering portion is suppressed from being obstructed by the movable body. As a result, when the movable body is located at the second position, it is possible to play with the aim of entering the first ball entry portion, without disturbing the entry status of the first ball entry portion. It is possible to improve the ease of entering the second ball entry section.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the variable receiving means is configured so that a gaming ball can flow down in front of the variable receiving means when it is switched to the second state.

According to the above configuration, the front region of the variable receiving means can be utilized as a flow region of the game ball. As a result, the flow area is expanded and the area that can be used as the flow area is increased as compared with the configuration in which the game ball cannot flow or is difficult to flow in front of the variable receiving means, and as a result, the entire game area (front of the game board). It is possible to reduce the ratio of the flow area occupied by. When the flow area is expanded, the movement of the game ball is diversified to make it more interesting, and when the ratio of the flow area is reduced, the arrangement and expansion of game parts such as decorative members, movable accessories, and winning openings are added. Since it becomes easy to secure a space for increasing the size, it can be a preferable mode in a gaming machine in which a gaming area is limited. Further, the front region of the variable receiving means can be used as a part of the flow path to the first ball entry portion, and the route can be easily simplified as compared with the case where the flow path is constructed by bypassing the variable receiving means. Become. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the route to the first ball entry portion, and the playability is improved.

In the feature A4, "the front side" may be read as "the front side of the variable receiving means in the front view of the gaming machine". Similarly, in each of the following features, "the front side of the variable receiving means" may be read as "the front side of the variable receiving means in the front view of the gaming machine".

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the second determination is made more advantageous to the player than the first determination is made.

In the above configuration, since the second ball entry section is more advantageous than the first ball entry section, the player strongly desires to enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, there is a need to allow as many game balls as possible to enter the second entering portion. Under such circumstances, in the configuration described in any one of A1 to A4, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball heading for the first ball entry section enters the second ball entry section, and the second ball is entered. 2 Priority is given to entering the ball into the ball entry section. As a result, the configuration can be configured to meet the needs of the player, and the motivation for playing can be increased.

Feature A6. The first privilege granting means (the function of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81, the payout control) capable of granting the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering portion. The prize ball function based on the winning of the lower operating port 305 by the device 97) and
A second privilege granting means (upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) capable of granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion. Function to shift to open / close execution mode, prize ball function based on winning the upper operating port 303 by the payout control device 97),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, which comprises the above-mentioned features A1 to A4.

In the above configuration, since the second privilege is more advantageous than the first privilege, the player strongly desires to enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, there is a need to allow as many game balls as possible to enter the second entering portion. Under such circumstances, in the configuration described in any one of A1 to A4, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball heading for the first ball entry section enters the second ball entry section, and the second ball is entered. 2 Priority is given to entering the ball into the ball entry section. As a result, the configuration can be configured to meet the needs of the player, and the motivation for playing can be increased.

Feature A7. One of the features A1 to A6, wherein the variable receiving means and the first ball receiving portion are arranged vertically and the variable receiving means is arranged above the first ball receiving portion. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the entry into the second entry portion is prioritized with a simple configuration. Further, from the appearance, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry portion, and it is possible to improve the motivation to play the game.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the variable receiving means is arranged adjacent to the first ball-entry portion.

According to the above configuration, since the variable receiving means is arranged adjacent to the first ball entry section, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the ball entry status of the game ball into each entry section without moving the line of sight. ..

When this feature is applied to the feature A5 or A6, "Which of the first and second ball entry sections is of great concern to the player is the first ball entry section. In addition, since the variable receiving means can be easily visually recognized at the same time, the player can easily grasp which ball entering portion the ball has entered, and the playability is improved. "

In addition, when this feature is applied to feature A7, "it becomes easier to grasp the positional relationship between the first ball entry section and the variable receiving means at a glance, and the impression that the game ball easily enters the second ball entry section is given. The effect of "making it easier to give" is expected.

Feature A9. The predetermined receiving area includes a gaming ball that flows down the first flow path that allows the ball to enter the first ball entry portion, and a ball that cannot enter the first ball entry portion or enters the first flow path from the first flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is formed so as to be able to accept both a gaming ball flowing down a difficult second flow path.

According to the above configuration, not only the game ball heading for the first ball entry section but also other game balls can easily enter the second ball entry section. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it becomes easier to expect that the game ball is accepted by the second ball entry portion, and the expectation for the first state can be increased. It is possible for the player to easily grasp the switching to the one state as an opportunity, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the variable receiving means.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the size of the predetermined receiving area is larger than the size of the entrance of the first ball entry portion.

In the above configuration, the difficulty of entering the second ball in the first state is suppressed to be lower than the difficulty of entering the first ball in the second state. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it becomes easier to expect that the game ball is accepted by the second ball entry portion, and the expectation for the first state can be increased. It is possible for the player to easily grasp the switching to the one state as an opportunity, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the variable receiving means.

In the feature A10, preferably, the size of the predetermined receiving region can be made to be twice or more and five times or less the size of the entrance of the first ball entry portion. By doubling or more, it is possible to make it easier for game balls other than the game ball heading for the first ball entry section to enter the second ball entry section. In addition, the following effects can be expected by setting the value to 5 times or less. If the size exceeds 5 times, it becomes too easy to enter the second ball, and as a result, the frequency of switching to the first state has to be reduced due to the specifications of the gaming machine. In this respect, with the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately limit the entry of balls into the second entry portion, and it is possible to ensure an appropriate frequency of switching to the first state. Further, as a result of the increase in the occupancy ratio of the variable receiving means in the game area, there is a possibility that restrictions on the flow area of the game ball and the installation area of other game parts may be strengthened, but this is suppressed and the game area is limited. It can be the optimum configuration inside.

In the feature A10, "the size of the predetermined receiving area" and "the size of the entrance of the first ball entering portion" are set to "the size of the predetermined receiving area in front view from the front of the gaming machine", respectively. And "the size of the entrance of the first ball entry portion in the front view from the front of the gaming machine", or "the width of the predetermined receiving area in the front view from the front of the gaming machine" and "the front from the front of the gaming machine". It can be read as "the width of the entrance of the first ball entry portion in the visual sense".

Feature A11. A passing portion (first and second game nails 281,282) provided in the game area and having a passing width through which one game ball can pass is provided.
The game ball that has passed through the passing portion can flow down the flow path of the game ball to the first entry portion.
A guide means (first guide portion 365, 603) capable of guiding the game ball that has passed through the pass portion toward the first ball entry portion is provided between the passing portion and the first ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10.

According to the above configuration, by limiting the game ball toward the first ball entry section to the game ball that has passed through the passing section, it is possible to suppress excessive entry into the first and second ball entry sections. .. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion is guided toward the first entry portion by the guiding means, so that the player can easily move to the first entry portion and the receiving area, and the player can play with peace of mind. It becomes.

In the feature A11, "the game ball that has passed through the passing portion can flow down the flow path of the game ball to the first entry portion" is described as "the game ball that has passed through the passing portion is described above. It is possible to flow down the flow path of the game ball to the first entry portion with priority over the game ball that does not pass through the passing portion. ”Or“ Only the game ball that has passed through the passage portion is the first entry ball. It is possible to flow down the flow path of the game ball to the club. "

Feature A12. A game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface is provided.
The game according to feature A11, wherein the guiding means has a wall portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the gaming board and extends along the guiding direction of the gaming ball when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion can be stably guided to the first entering portion or the receiving region. Further, as compared with the case where the guiding means is composed of the game nails, the game ball can flow down smoothly, and the flow of the game ball is suppressed from being stagnant.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, wherein the guiding means includes a plurality of gaming nails arranged side by side in the guiding direction of the gaming balls and having a mutual distance of less than one gaming ball. ..

According to the above configuration, in the process of guiding the game ball, the game ball comes into contact with each game nail, so that the flow speed of the game ball tends to slow down, and the period until the game ball reaches the first ball entry portion or the receiving area. It becomes easy to prolong the period. As a result, the visibility of the movement of the game ball is enhanced, and it becomes easier to perform the production utilizing the above period, and the interest is improved.

Feature A14. The variable receiving means is configured so that the game ball can flow down in front of the variable receiving means when it is in the second state.
Ball guiding means (second guide units 371, 403, 451 and 503, first guide unit 603) capable of guiding a game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state to the first ball entry unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13.

According to the above configuration, the front region of the variable receiving means can be utilized as a guide region to the first ball entry portion. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the flow of the game ball to the first ball entry portion as compared with the configuration in which the game ball merely flows down in front of the variable receiving means.

Feature A15. The variable control means
Variable acceptance control means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state.
A state transition means (a normal game state by the main control device 81) for shifting to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition. Function to execute migration process) and
With
The specific state is controlled so as to end when the number of game balls entering the second ball entry portion reaches a predetermined upper limit number.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the upper limit is 5 or less.

A second determination is made based on the game ball entering the second entry portion. However, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the second determination is made. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid ball entry into the second ball entry portion when viewed in relation to the ball.

The feature A15 includes "information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
The variable control means
Variable acceptance control means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state.
A state transition means (a normal game state by the main control device 81) for shifting to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition. Function to execute migration process) and
With
The specific state is controlled so as to end when the number of game balls entering the second ball entry portion reaches a predetermined upper limit number.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the predetermined number is 4, and the upper limit is 5 or less. It can also be. In this case, "the predetermined number is 4 and the upper limit is 5 or less" is "the upper limit is a number equal to or less than the addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number". It may be read as.

Feature A16. The variable control means
Variable acceptance control means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state.
A state transition means (a normal game state by the main control device 81) for shifting to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition. Function to execute migration process) and
With
The variable acceptance control is performed so that the variable acceptance means is changed from the first state to the second state when the execution period of the first state reaches a predetermined upper limit period.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the upper limit period is 3 seconds or less.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid entry into the second entry portion when viewed in relation to the second determination. can.

In the feature A16, "3 sec or less" may be read as "0.6 sec or more and 3.0 sec or less".

Further, the feature A16 states that "the launching means can launch a game ball at a predetermined firing cycle.
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers is provided.
The variable control means
Variable acceptance control means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state.
A state transition means (a normal game state by the main control device 81) for shifting to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition. Function to execute migration process) and
With
The variable acceptance control is performed so that the variable acceptance means is changed from the first state to the second state when the execution period of the first state reaches a predetermined upper limit period.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the upper limit period is a period equal to or less than the product of the added value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the firing means. It can also be. In this case, "the product of the added value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the launching means" is "more than or equal to the firing cycle of the launching means and the added value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number". It may be read as "less than or equal to the product of the firing cycle of the firing means".

Feature A17. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 305) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry section (a function of executing a winning process for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81).
Grant determination means (the main control device 81 executes the hit / fail determination process for the lower operating port 305) that performs the grant determination process of whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to the predetermined grant information. Function) and
A second ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A first state provided in the game area, in which the game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the second ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the second ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to the state and
A variable control means (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, and
With
When the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state, the variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (accepting area RA) capable of receiving the game ball, and the game is received in the predetermined receiving area. It is configured to accept the ball into the second ball entry section.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined receiving region is formed on a flow path (first flow path R1) of a game ball to the first ball entry portion in the game area.

In the above configuration, a game aiming at entering the game ball into the first ball entry section and a game aiming at entering the game ball into the second ball entry section when the variable receiving means is in the first state. Coexist. Under such a configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, the result of the game ball entering the first ball entry section even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry portion, and there may be an inconvenience that the player cannot fully enjoy the profit in the first state.

In this respect, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, a predetermined receiving region is formed by the variable receiving means on the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion. Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the first ball entry section reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first ball entry section, and the reception of the game ball is hindered by the first ball entry section. It is suppressed. As a result, the opportunity to enter the second ball entry section is stably secured, and the player can properly enjoy the profit in the first state.

Feature A18. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 305) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry portion (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81).
The grant determination means (the main control device 81 executes the hit / fail determination process for the upper operating port 303) that performs the grant determination process of whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to the predetermined grant information. Function) and
A first state provided in the game area, in which the game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the second ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the second ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to the state and
A variable control means (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, and
With
When the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state, the variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (accepting area RA) capable of receiving the game ball, and the game is received in the predetermined receiving area. It is configured to accept the ball into the second ball entry section.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined receiving region is formed on a flow path (first flow path R1) of a game ball to the first ball entry portion in the game area.

In the above configuration, a game aiming at entering the game ball into the first ball entry section and a game aiming at entering the game ball into the second ball entry section when the variable receiving means is in the first state. When a game ball enters the second ball entry portion, the grant determination process is performed. Under such a configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, the result of the game ball entering the first ball entry section even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It may be difficult to enter the second ball entry section. That is, the opportunity to receive the second determination is deprived, and the inconvenience that the player cannot properly enjoy the profit in the first state may occur.

In this respect, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, a predetermined receiving region is formed by the variable receiving means on the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion. Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the first ball entry section reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first ball entry section, and the reception of the game ball is hindered by the first ball entry section. It is suppressed. As a result, the opportunity to receive the grant determination is stably secured, and the player can properly enjoy the profit in the first state.

Feature A19. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 305) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A first information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81) to acquire the first information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion.
A first determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81) that makes a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means.
A second ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) to acquire the second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion.
A second determination means (a function of the main control device 81 to execute a hit / fail determination process for the upper operating port 303) that makes a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means.
A first state provided in the game area, in which the game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the second ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the second ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to the state and
A variable control means (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, and
With
The variable receiving means is provided upstream of the first ball entry portion, and is provided.
When the variable receiving means is in the first state, the gaming ball cannot enter the first ball entering portion, or the gaming ball is in the second state as compared with the case where the variable receiving means is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as to make it difficult to enter the first ball entry portion.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the variable receiving means is configured so as to be unable to enter or difficult to enter the first ball entry portion. It correlates with the ease of entering the first ball entry section. As a result, depending on whether the variable receiving means is in the first state or the second state, a game in which the game ball is inserted into the first ball entry portion and a game in which the game ball is inserted into the second entry ball portion. Can be clearly separated from the player's point of view. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the player is suppressed from being distracted by the first ball receiving portion, and the variable receiving means and the second ball entering portion are effectively focused on. Will be possible.

Further, since simultaneous entry into the first and second entry sections is suppressed, control required for each acquisition process for acquiring the first and second information and the determination process corresponding to each of the information. It is possible to reduce the processing load. In addition, since it is less necessary to consider the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion during the execution of the first state, the game design can be facilitated.

Feature A20. The variable receiving means is
It has a movable body (opening / closing member 331, 511) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position, and the movable body is the second position. It is configured to be able to switch from the second state to the first state by displacing from the first position.
The game according to feature A19, wherein when the movable body is located at the first position, the movable body can prevent the game ball from entering the first ball entry portion. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the movable body located at the first position directly hinders the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, It is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the first ball entry portion.

Feature A21. The first ball entry portion is configured to open upward.
The variable receiving means is configured so that when the movable body is located at the first position, the movable body can cover at least a part of the opening of the first ball entry portion from above. The gaming machine according to the feature A20.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, it becomes easy to understand from the player's point of view that the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the first ball entry portion. In addition, a configuration capable of inhibiting the entry of the ball into the first entry portion by the movable body can be realized in a practically preferable manner.

Feature A22. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 305) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A first state provided in the game area, in which the game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the second ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the second ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to the state and
A variable control means (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, and
With
The variable receiving means is configured to form a predetermined receiving area (accepting area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when the second state is switched to the first state.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined receiving region is formed on a flow path (first flow path R1) of a game ball to the first ball entry portion in the game area.

In the above configuration, a game aiming at entering the game ball into the first ball entry section and a game aiming at entering the game ball into the second ball entry section when the variable receiving means is in the first state. Coexist. Under such a configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, the result of the game ball entering the first ball entry section even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry portion, and there may be an inconvenience that the player cannot fully enjoy the profit in the first state.

In this respect, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, a predetermined receiving region is formed by the variable receiving means on the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion. Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the first ball entry section reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first ball entry section, and the reception of the game ball is hindered by the first ball entry section. It is suppressed. As a result, the opportunity to enter the second ball entry section is stably secured, and the player can properly enjoy the profit in the first state.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A first state provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched, and
A variable control means (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, and
With
The variable receiving means is configured so that the game ball can flow down in front of the variable receiving means when it is in the second state.
A defining means (second guide unit 371, 403, 451, 503, first guide unit 603) capable of defining the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the above configuration, the front region of the variable receiving means can be utilized as an adjustment region for determining the flow direction of the game ball or changing the flow direction. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the game ball only passes in front of the variable receiving means, it is possible to stabilize the flow mode of the game ball and diversify the movement of the game ball, which improves the interest. do.

In addition, the "flow direction of the game ball" of the above feature B1 is "the flow direction of the game ball in a direction other than the front-rear direction in the front view from the front of the game machine" or "the vertical direction and the left-right direction in the front view from the front of the game machine". It may be read as "the direction of flow of the game ball in at least one of the above". Alternatively, after adding the configuration of "providing the game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface" to the feature B1, the "flow direction of the game ball" of the feature B1 is changed to "the front surface of the game board". It may be read as "the flow direction of the game ball in the direction along the line" or "the flow direction of the game ball in the direction parallel to the front surface of the game board".

Feature B2. The first ball entry part as the ball entry part and
A second ball entry section (lower operating port 305) provided in the game area and different from the first ball entry section on which a game ball can enter,
With
The second ball entry portion is arranged downstream of the variable receiving means.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the defining means is configured so that a gaming ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means can be guided to the second entry portion.

According to the above configuration, the front area of the variable receiving means can be utilized as a guide area. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the flow of the game ball to the second ball entry portion as compared with the configuration in which the game ball only passes in front of the variable receiving means.

Feature B3. A game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface is provided.
The second ball entry portion is open upward and
The defining means and the second ball entry portion are characterized in that they project forward from the front surface of the game board and are separated from each other so that the distance between them is larger than the diameter of the game ball. The gaming machine described in feature B2.

Where the game ball is guided to the second entry portion by the regulated means, according to this feature, the game ball guided by the regulated means is second by utilizing the distance between the regulated means and the second entry portion. It is possible to deviate from the route toward the ball entry section. As a result, not only the game ball that receives the guidance is prevented from always entering the second entry section, but also the game ball that does not receive the guidance can enter the second entry section. Monotonization is suppressed.

Feature B4. The variable receiving means has a movable body (opening / closing member 331, 511) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position, and is movable. It is configured so that the body can be switched from the second state to the first state by displacing the body from the second position to the first position.
When the movable body is located at the second position, the game ball is configured to flow down in front of the movable body.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the defining means is configured to be able to define the flow direction of a gaming ball flowing down in front of the movable body located at the second position.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is properly set to the first state and the variable receiving means is in the second state, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means can be preferably defined.

Feature B5. The prescribed means
The flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the movable body can be defined in a predetermined direction.
It is provided with wall portions (second guide portions 371, 403, 451 and 503, first guide portion 603) that project forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position and extend in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature B4.

In a configuration in which the game ball can flow down in front of the movable body located at the second position, if the game ball stays in front of the movable body, the game ball prevents the movable body from being displaced to the first position. Is a concern. In this respect, according to this feature, in defining the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down, and the game ball stagnates or rampages in front of the movable body located at the second position. Is suppressed. As a result, it is suppressed that the displacement of the movable body to the first position is hindered by the stagnant game balls, and the second state of the variable receiving means is utilized while utilizing the front area of the variable receiving means as a predetermined area. It becomes possible to satisfactorily switch from the first state to the first state.

The feature B5 may further include the feature that "the defined surface of the game ball in the flow direction on the wall portion is flat". In this case, it becomes possible to further smooth the flow of the game ball in front of the variable receiving means.

Further, in the above feature B5, the "first position" may be read as "the first position in which the movable body protrudes forward from the second position".

Feature B6. The defining means projects forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position.
The feature B4 or B5 is provided with a suppressing means (first guide portion 365) for suppressing the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area from coming into contact with the upper surface of the defining means from above the defining means. Described gaming machine.

When the game ball flowing down the game area comes into contact with or rests on the upper surface of the specified means from above the specified means, the flow speed is greatly reduced immediately before or during the passage in front of the movable body, and the second There is a concern that the flow of the game ball may slow down in front of the movable body located at the position, but according to this feature, this is suppressed by the suppressing means. As a result, the displacement of the movable body to the first position is suppressed, and the variable receiving means can be switched from the second state to the first state while utilizing the front area of the variable receiving means as a defined area. It will be possible to do well.

Feature B7. The movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position.
The defining means includes a confronting portion facing the front surface of the movable body located at the second position so as to be separated from the front surface of the movable body.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, wherein the distance between the facing portion and the front surface of the movable body increases as the distance goes downward.

According to the above configuration, when the movable body rotates from the second position to the first position, it is possible to suppress the interference between the defining means and the movable body.

Feature B8. The facing portion is formed in an arc shape that is convex on the side opposite to the movable body located at the second position when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation axis of the movable body, and the curvature thereof is the movable. The gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized in that the curvature of a rotation locus at one point on the body is substantially the same.

According to the above configuration, the movable body can be rotated while maintaining a gap having a substantially constant size with the specified means. As a result, it is possible to preferably regulate the flow direction in front of the movable body while appropriately suppressing the interference between the movable body and the defining means.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B8, wherein the defining means (second guide portion 371) is provided on the front surface of the movable body.

According to the above configuration, a configuration in which the front region of the variable receiving means is utilized as a defined region can be realized in a practically preferable manner. In feature B9, "provided on the front surface of the movable body" may be read as "connected or integrally formed on the front surface of the movable body".

Feature B10. A game component (window panel 62) is arranged in front of the movable body at a distance from the movable body.
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the defining means on the front surface of the movable body is displaced integrally with the movable body, the movable body is displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position. .. Compared with the case where the movable body moves linearly in the front-rear direction, the interference of the regulating means with the game parts can be alleviated, and it becomes easy to secure a large displacement amount of the movable body.

In the feature B10, "the movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position", "the ball entry portion opens forward and the game The movable body is provided with an opening through which a sphere can pass, and the movable body can cover the opening from the front at the second position, and can rotate forward from the second position to the first position. It can be displaced to. "

Feature B11. The movable body and the game component located at the second position are separated from each other so that the defined means and the game component do not intersect in the process of displacement of the movable body from the second position to the first position. The gaming machine according to feature B10, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the defining means and the gaming parts from being damaged due to the collision of the defining means with the front gaming parts.

Feature B12. The movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position.
2. The gaming machine described in either.

In the configuration in which the movable body is displaced from the second position to the first position by rotating forward, when the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the specified means from above, the movable body is moved to the first position by the impact. There is a concern that the variable receiving means will be in the first state regardless of the switching control. In this respect, according to this feature, since the contact of the game ball from above with the specified means is suppressed by the suppressing means, it is suppressed that the variable receiving means is unexpectedly put into the first state.

Feature B13. A game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface is provided.
A lead-out means (first guide unit 365) for leading out a game ball that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board and flows down the game area to the front of the movable body located at the second position is provided.
The derivation means is arranged above the defined means in a state where the movable body is located at the second position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B12, wherein the distance between the deriving means and the defined means is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, since the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the front of the movable body by the derivation means, the game ball enters the ball entry portion when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It becomes easier to do. Further, since the derivation means is arranged above the defining means and the distance between the two means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball from the derivation means can be easily guided to the defining means, and further, the derivation means. The means can also be used as a suppressing means (means for suppressing the game ball from coming into contact with the upper surface of the defining means from above the defining means).

Feature B14. The defining means (second guide portions 403, 451 and 503) is from the rear of the movable body (opening / closing member 331, front wall portion 513 of the opening / closing member 511) located at the second position to the front of the movable body. It has been extended to
The game according to any one of features B4 to B13, wherein the movable body is provided with an insertion portion (notch portion 411, through hole 517) through which the defined means can be inserted at least at the second position. Machine.

According to the above configuration, a configuration in which the front region of the variable receiving means is utilized as a defined region can be realized in a practically preferable manner. Further, the movable body can be displaced while leaving the defining means, and the flow direction of the game ball can be suitably defined at both the first position and the second position.

In addition, with respect to feature B14, "the movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position, and the movable body is separated from the movable body in front of the movable body. Then, the game component (window panel 62) is arranged ”may be applied. In this case, since the defining means can be immobilized regardless of the displacement of the movable body, the defining means can be extended forward within a range that does not come into contact with the game parts, and the distance between the defining means and the game parts can be easily reduced. It can be less than the diameter. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing in front of the defining means, and it is possible to preferably define the flow direction of the game ball.

Feature B15. The feature B14 is characterized in that the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is provided with a suppressing means (first guide portion 365) for suppressing the contact of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming region with the upper surface of the defining means from above. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the defining means from being damaged by the contact of the game ball with the upper surface of the defining means from above. Further, it is suppressed that the game ball is significantly decelerated immediately before or when the game ball passes in front of the movable body, and the stagnation of the game ball in front of the movable body located at the second position is suppressed. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the stagnant game ball from hindering the displacement of the movable body to the first position, and it is possible to satisfactorily switch the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state.

Feature B16. A game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface is provided.
A lead-out means (first guide unit 365) for leading out a game ball that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board and flows down the game area to the front of the movable body located at the second position is provided.
The derivation means is arranged above the defined means in a state where the movable body is located at the second position.
The gaming machine according to feature B14 or B15, wherein the distance between the deriving means and the defined means is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, since the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the front of the movable body by the derivation means, the game ball enters the ball entry portion when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It can be made easier. Further, since the derivation means is arranged above the defining means and the distance between the two means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball from the derivation means can be easily guided to the defining means, and further, the derivation means. It becomes possible to utilize the means as a restraining means.

Feature B17. As the insertion portion, a notch portion (notch portion 411) obtained by cutting out a part of the movable body from the edge portion of the movable body is provided, and the specified means can insert the notch portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B14 to B16.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the flow direction of the game ball can be defined by extending the defining means from the rear to the front of the movable body in a practically preferable manner.

According to the above configuration, the notch portion can be made smaller in order to suppress the interference between the movable body and the defining means. This makes it possible to preferably define the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the movable body while suppressing a decrease in the rigidity and strength of the movable body.

Feature B18. Any of features B14 to B17, characterized in that the insertion portion is provided with a through hole (through hole 517) that penetrates the movable body in the front-rear direction, and the defining means can be inserted through the through hole. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the flow direction of the game ball can be defined by extending the defining means from the rear to the front of the movable body in a practically preferable manner.

Feature B19. The ball entry portion has an opening that opens forward and allows a game ball to pass through.
The movable body is
A wall portion (front wall portion 513) capable of covering the opening from the front at the second position, and
An extension portion (extension portion 515) extending rearward from the back surface of the wall portion,
With
The gaming machine according to feature B18, which is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position by linearly moving in the front-rear direction.

In the configuration in which the defining means is inserted into the through hole of the movable body, if the movable body is displaced to the first position and the second position by rotation, the through hole is used to avoid interference between the defining means and the movable body. It is necessary to expand the structure, and there is a concern that the rigidity and strength of the movable body will decrease. In this respect, according to this feature, since the movable body is displaced to the first position and the second position by the linear movement in the front-rear direction, the expansion of the through hole is suppressed, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably eliminated. become. Further, in this feature, when the movable body is displaced to the first position, the extending portion functions as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball from above. As a result, it becomes possible to properly accept the game ball flowing down the game area. In addition, since the opening is covered by the wall when the movable body is located at the second position, even if the flow direction of the game ball changes due to a collision with the specified means, the ball enters the game ball. The dive is suppressed.

Feature B20. A protrusion (first guide portion 603) provided in the game area around the movable body and projecting forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position is provided.
Features B4 to B19 characterized in that the defining means is configured by extending the protruding portion to at least the front of the movable body located at the second position when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the above configuration, a continuous defined path can be constructed straddling the peripheral region of the movable body and the front region of the movable body, and the flow of the game ball can be suitably defined. In addition, since the defining means can be provided integrally with the peripheral members of the movable body, the strength and rigidity of the defining means can be increased as compared with the case where the defining means are independently provided in front of the movable body. Becomes possible.

Feature B21. A game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface is provided.
When the movable body is located at the second position, the front surface of the movable body is located substantially flush with the front surface of the game board or behind the front surface of the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B4 to B20.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the front of the movable body, it is prevented from being caught by the movable body, causing the flow of the game ball to be stagnant or the movable body to be damaged.

The "front surface of the game board" of feature B21 is also understood as the front surface of the base body in a configuration in which the movable body is provided on the base body and the game ball can flow down in front of the base body. Can be done.

Feature B22. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A first state provided in the game area, in which the game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the second ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to
A variable control means (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, and
With
The variable receiving means is configured so that the game ball can flow down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state.
A gaming machine comprising a changing means capable of changing the flow direction of a gaming ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state.

According to the above configuration, the front region of the variable receiving means can be utilized as a changing region for changing the flow direction of the game ball. In this case, the movement of the game ball can be diversified as compared with the configuration in which the game ball only passes in front of the variable receiving means, and the interest is improved. It is possible to apply each of the configurations described in any of features B2 to B21 to this feature, and in this case, the "defining means" in each configuration can be read as "changing means".

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
Grant determination means (the main control device 81 executes the hit / fail determination process for the upper operating port 303) that performs the grant determination process of whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the predetermined grant information. Function to do) and
A first state provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched, and
A variable control means (execution of electric service support processing by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined switching condition. Function) and
A function of executing processing during fluctuation of a normal figure by a notification control means (effect control device 82) that controls so that a specific notification corresponding to an execution mode of the switching control is executed by a predetermined notification means (first light emitting unit 311). )When,
With
The predetermined notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means in the game area, and the game ball can flow down in front of the variable receiving means.
The gaming machine characterized in that the notification control means includes means for enabling the specific notification to be executed before switching to the first state when the switching control is executed by the variable control means. ..

In the above configuration, since the grant determination is made based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the entry section. Under such a premise, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed by the predetermined notification means, and the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It is configured to be executed. Therefore, the player can predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the expectation that the game ball will enter the ball entry portion is increased. On top of that, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, and the game ball can flow down in front of the notification means. Therefore, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means. As a result, it becomes possible to provide a game property for enjoying whether or not the game ball passing in front of the notification means enters the ball entry portion, and the interest is improved.

Further, since the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball, the flow path can be used not only as the flow area of the game ball but also as the notification area. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the flow-down area and the notification area are separate, it becomes easier to secure a large flow-down area, and it becomes possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

Feature C2. The gaming machine of feature C1 characterized in that the predetermined notification means is provided upstream of the variable receiving means in the gaming area and around the variable receiving means.

According to the above configuration, the notification means, the game ball, and the variable receiving means can be visually recognized at the same time, and the points of interest of the player can be aggregated. This makes it easier to grasp the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means and the movement of the variable receiving means while paying attention to the specific notification. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the flow from the start of the specific notification to the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion as a series, and it becomes possible to realize a game effect in which the notification means and the variable receiving means are linked. Become.

Feature C3. The game ball flowing down the first flow path (first flow path R1) and the game ball flowing down the second flow path (second flow path R2) different from the first flow path reach the variable receiving means. It is configured to be possible and
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided on each of the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the above configuration, since the game ball can reach the variable receiving means through a plurality of flow paths, the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means is not unified, and the monotonization of the game is suppressed. NS. In addition, there is a concern that the visibility of the specific notification may be reduced by the game ball flowing down in front of the notification means. However, in this feature, since the notification means are provided on each flow-down route, one flow-down route can be used. Even if the visibility of the specific notification is reduced due to the flow of the game ball, the specific notification can be grasped through another flow route. As a result, the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to grasp the specific notification due to the passage of the game ball can be suitably eliminated, and the flow area and the notification area can be suitably compatible with each other.

Feature C4. The first flow path and the second flow path are adjacent to each other.
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided so as to straddle the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is flowing down one flow path, it is possible to grasp the specific notification by slightly shifting the line of sight. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means and the specific notification at the same time, and it is possible to suppress the presence or absence of the ball entering the ball entry portion and the oversight of the specific notification.

Feature C5. The predetermined notification means includes a light emitting means capable of emitting light (first light emitting unit 311).
The notification control means is provided with a light emission control means (a function of executing a process during fluctuation of a normal figure by the effect control device 82) that controls the light emission means so as to execute a predetermined light emission effect as the specific notification. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

In the above configuration, specific notification is performed depending on the presence / absence of light emission of the light emitting means, the change of the light emitting color, and the like. In this case, the specific notification can be performed with simple contents as compared with the case where the effect is configured by displaying a moving image using a display device or the like. Therefore, even if the game ball flows down in front of the notification means, it becomes easy to understand the notification content, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized in order to achieve both the flow-down area and the notification area.

Feature C6. The light emitting means
A luminous body (luminous body 360) capable of emitting light toward the front, and
A translucent portion (translucent portion 341) that is arranged in front of the light emitting body and allows a game ball to flow down in front of the light emitting body.
With
The translucent portion is characterized in that at least a region overlapping the flow path on the front surface thereof is flat, and a diffusing portion that diffuses light from the light emitting body is provided behind the front surface. Features The gaming machine according to C5.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the flow area and the notification area are compatible, the light of the light emitting body can be diffused and irradiated forward while facilitating the flow of the game ball in front of the translucent portion. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect without disturbing the flow of the game ball.

Feature C7. The predetermined notification means is
The first light emitting means (first light emitting unit 311) as the light emitting means and
A second light emitting means (second light emitting unit 317) that is arranged around the first light emitting means and can emit light,
With
The first light emitting means is configured so that a game ball can flow down in front of the first light emitting means.
The second light emitting means is configured such that the game ball cannot flow down in front of the second light emitting means or is less likely to flow down than the first light emitting means.
When the predetermined light emitting effect is executed, the first light emitting means may emit light in the first light emitting mode, and the second light emitting means may emit light in a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or C6, which is capable of being configured.

In the above configuration, a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means arranged around the first light emitting means are provided, and when a predetermined light emitting effect is executed, each light emitting means can emit light in a different light emitting mode. ing. As a result, each light emitting means can be made to emit light in a light emitting mode according to the difference in characteristics such as whether or not the game ball flows down in front (whether or not it is easy to flow down). For example, the first light emitting means in which the game ball can flow down in front is made to emit light in a light emitting mode that emphasizes the visibility of the game ball, while the second light emitting means in which the game ball cannot flow down or is difficult to flow down in front is emitted. It is possible to emit light in a light emitting mode that emphasizes attracting the attention of the player. This makes it possible to easily grasp the flow of the game ball flowing down in front of the notification means while directing the player's attention to the specific notification.

Feature C8. The game according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that a guiding means (first guiding unit 365) capable of guiding a gaming ball flowing down in front of the predetermined notification means to the variable receiving means is provided. Machine.

According to the above configuration, not only is it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry portion when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, but also the flow of the game ball in front of the notification means can be stabilized. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from going wild in front of the notification means and reducing the visibility of the specific notification.

Feature C9. The predetermined notification means includes a light emitting means capable of emitting light (first light emitting unit 311).
The notification control means includes a light emission control means (a function of executing a process during fluctuation of a normal figure by the effect control device 82) that controls the light emission means so as to execute a predetermined light emission effect as the specific notification.
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the guiding means has light transmission.

According to the above configuration, the guidance means can be used as the notification area, and the deterioration of the visibility of the specific notification by the guidance means is suppressed.

When this feature is applied to any of the features C5 to C7 via the feature C8, it may be said that "the guide means is provided in the light emitting means and has light transmission property". .. In this case, the effect that "the guidance means can be used as a part of the light emitting means and the visibility of the specific notification is enhanced" is expected.

Feature C10. The predetermined notification means is provided as the first notification means.
The game rotation operation is started by a second notification means different from the first notification means, and the game rotation operation ends as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one of the game times. The features C1 to C9, which are provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the game turn operation of each game turn. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the above configuration, the notification regarding the game rotation operation in which the determination result of the grant determination means is reflected and the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable acceptance means are performed by the respective notification means. .. As a result, the player is prevented from confusing the two notifications, and it is possible to promote an appropriate grasp of the contents of each notification.

Feature C11. The variable receiving means is arranged below the second notifying means.
The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the first notification means is arranged between the second notification means and the variable receiving means.

According to the above configuration, while the player is paying attention to the second notification means, the line of sight is shifted to the first notification means when the first notification means executes the specific notification, and then the line of sight is shifted to the first notification means, and then according to the flow of the game ball. The line of sight should be shifted to the variable receiving means. That is, the natural downward movement of the line of sight starting from the second notification means makes it possible to visually recognize the first notification means and the variable receiving means in an appropriate order, and facilitates understanding of the effect.

Feature C12. As the gaming state, at least a first gaming state (high frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the variable receiving means is less likely to be the first state than the first gaming state. Have and
The variable control means includes means for executing the switching control based on the fact that a predetermined switching condition is satisfied in the second gaming state.
The notification control means is such that when the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state in the second gaming state, the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, which comprises means for controlling a predetermined notification means.

In the second gaming state, since the variable receiving means is rarely switched to the first state, there is a concern that the player's interest in the variable receiving means will be diminished and it will be difficult for the player to notice when switching to the first state. .. In this respect, according to this feature, since the specific notification is executed when the switching to the first state is performed in the second gaming state, the player can easily notice the switching to the first state and play. Ease is improved.

Feature C13. The variable control means
A mode determining means for determining the mode of the first state executed by the switching control, and
A means for executing the switching control in a mode determined by the mode determining means based on the establishment of the predetermined switching condition, and a means for executing the switching control.
Is equipped with
The first aspect, which can be determined by the aspect determining means, includes a first aspect (low winning support state) and a second aspect (first aspect) in which a game ball is more easily accepted in the entry portion than the first aspect. High prize support status) and is included,
The notification control means includes means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is performed when the switching control is executed according to the second aspect. The gaming machine according to any one of C12.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched and controlled in the second mode in which it is easy to expect the game ball to enter the ball entry portion, the specific notification is performed, so that the player is based on the specific notification. When a game ball is launched so as to aim at a variable receiving means, it becomes easier to feel the reward (entry into the ball entry portion). As a result, the degree of interest in the specific notification can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Feature C14. A second ball entry portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a through winning process by the main control device 81) for acquiring the second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion, and
A second determination means for determining whether or not the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means corresponds to the predetermined second grant information (Public drawing game rotation by the main control device 81). Function to execute control processing) and
With
The variable control means is based on the fact that the result of the second grant determination by the second determination means is the second correspondence result that the second information to be determined corresponds to the second grant information. , The switching control is configured to be executed.
The notification control means uses the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is started after the second grant determination is performed by the second determination means and before the switching control is executed by the variable control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, which comprises means for controlling.

According to the above configuration, the switching control of the variable receiving means is performed based on the determination result of the second grant determination, and the specific notification is performed after the second grant determination is performed and before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. Is started, so that it is possible to execute the specific notification before switching to the first state while trying to match the execution mode of the switching control.

Feature C15. A second ball entry portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a through winning process by the main control device 81) for acquiring the second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion, and
A second information storage means (electric service holding area 233) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and
A second determination means (general diagram by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to the predetermined second grant information. Function to execute game times control processing) and
Regarding the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the result of the second grant determination when the predetermined second information is the target of the second grant determination is the predetermined information. The destination identification means for specifying the second information at a timing earlier than the target of the second grant determination, and
With
The variable control means is based on the fact that the result of the second grant determination by the second determination means is the second correspondence result that the second information to be determined corresponds to the second grant information. , The switching control is configured to be executed.
Any of the features C1 to C14, wherein the notification control means includes means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is executed based on the specific result of the prior identification means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to secure a long notification period for the specific notification while starting the specific notification before switching to the first state. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize the specific notification, and to diversify the mode of the specific notification to enhance the effect of the effect.

Feature C16. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
Grant determination means (the main control device 81 executes the hit / fail determination process for the upper operating port 303) that performs the grant determination process of whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the predetermined grant information. Function to do) and
A first state provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched, and
A variable control means (execution of electric service support processing by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined switching condition. Function) and
A function of executing processing during fluctuation of a normal figure by a notification control means (effect control device 82) that controls so that a specific notification corresponding to an execution mode of the switching control is executed by a predetermined notification means (first light emitting unit 311). )When,
With
The predetermined notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means in the game area, and the game ball can flow down behind the variable receiving means, and the rear side thereof can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. Has been
The gaming machine characterized in that the notification control means includes means for enabling the specific notification to be executed before switching to the first state when the switching control is executed by the variable control means. ..

In the above configuration, since the grant determination is made based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the entry section. Under such a premise, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed by the predetermined notification means, and the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It is configured to be executed. Therefore, the player can predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the expectation that the game ball will enter the ball entry portion is increased. In addition, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, the game ball can flow down behind it, and the rear side can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means. As a result, it becomes possible to provide a game property for enjoying whether or not the game ball passing behind the notification means enters the ball entry portion, and the interest is improved.

Further, since the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball, the flow path can be used not only as the flow area of the game ball but also as the notification area. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the flow-down area and the notification area are separate, it becomes easier to secure a large flow-down area, and it becomes possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

Feature C17. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
It is divided into a first state, which is provided in the game area and is easy to accept or accept the game ball in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be replaced,
A variable control means (execution of electric service support processing by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined switching condition. Function) and
A notification control means (a function of executing processing during fluctuation of a normal figure by the effect control device 82) that controls so that a specific notification according to an execution mode of the switching control is executed by a predetermined notification means, and
With
The predetermined notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means in the game area, and the game ball can flow down at least one of the front and the rear thereof.
The notification control means is a gaming machine including means for enabling the specific notification to be executed before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.

In the above configuration, since the privilege is given based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the entry section. Under such a premise, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed by the notification means, and the specific notification is executed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It has a structure. Therefore, the player can predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the expectation that the game ball will enter the ball entry portion is increased. In addition, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, and the game ball can flow down at least one of the front side and the rear side thereof. Therefore, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means. This not only provides the player with a preparation period for launching the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means, but also enjoys whether or not the game ball passing in front of the notification means enters the ball entry section. It becomes possible to provide sex and the interest is improved.

Further, since the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball, the flow path can be used not only as the flow area of the game ball but also as the notification area. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the flow-down area and the notification area are separate, it becomes easier to secure a large flow-down area, and it becomes possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Grant determination means (the pass / fail determination process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) that performs grant determination processing as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information. Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation is started by a predetermined notification means, and the end of the game rotation operation as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is regarded as one game rotation, and the game rotation of each game rotation is performed. A game time control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) that controls so that the operation is performed, and
A first state provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched, and
A variable control means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state.
Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined transition conditions, the state transition means (shift to the normal game state by the main control device 81) for shifting to the specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed a plurality of times. Function to execute processing) and
With
In the plurality of variable acceptance controls executed in the specific state, when a game ball enters the ball entry portion in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, the game times corresponding to the entry. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the variable acceptance control after the end of the ball-entry-corresponding gaming round.

According to the above configuration, special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section, and the special information is stored in the information storage means. Then, the grant determination process of whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the grant information is performed, and further, the game round is executed corresponding to the grant determination process. In this configuration, the number of special information stored in the information storage means decreases as the game times are executed, and the free area in which new special information can be stored increases accordingly. On the premise of such a configuration, in this feature, in a plurality of variable acceptance controls executed in a specific state, when a game ball enters the entry portion by executing the previous variable acceptance control, the ball enters. It is configured so that the variable acceptance control after the end of the game round can be executed.

For example, if a game ball enters the ball entry section by executing the variable acceptance control, the game times corresponding to the ball entry continue until the end of the specific state, which is specified from the start of the game times. Until the end of the state, no new free space is generated by the information storage means. Therefore, it is assumed that the player's interest in entering the ball into the ball entry portion is diminished after the number of stored information storage means reaches the upper limit during the transition to the specific state. Furthermore, since no new free space is created in the information storage means, at most, only the total number of grant judgment opportunities, which is the total number of times the grant judgment is executed based on the first entry and the maximum number of special information stored, is acquired. There is also a concern that it cannot be done.

In this regard, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the ball entry section during the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, the ball entry corresponding game round is terminated before the start of the later variable acceptance control. It becomes possible to start the next game round. As a result, the later variable acceptance control can be started after increasing the free area of the information storage means, and there is a desire to enter the ball into the ball entry portion during the execution of the later variable acceptance control. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in entering the ball through the specific state. Furthermore, it is possible to obtain a number of grant determination opportunities that exceeds the sum of the execution amount of the grant determination based on the first entry and the maximum number of stored special information. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to allow many game balls to enter the entry section during the specific state is enhanced, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

Feature D2. As the gaming state, there are at least a first gaming state (high frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the variable receiving means is less likely to be the first state than the first gaming state. And
The transition condition is configured to be feasible in the second gaming state.
In the specific state executed in the second game state, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion in the execution of the variable acceptance control, after the end of the ball entry corresponding game times. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the variable acceptance control can be executed.

In the first gaming state, which is likely to be the first state, the control state (referred to as a support state for convenience) of the variable acceptance means in which one or a plurality of variable acceptance controls are set as one set is likely to be repeated at short intervals. Even if the number of grant judgment opportunities is small in the support state of, the player's psychology that the shortage should be supplemented in the next support state works. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, which is unlikely to be the first state, the period from the end of the support state to the occurrence of the next support state tends to be long, and it is difficult to expect replenishment of grant determination opportunities. Therefore, unlike the case of the first game state, there is a strong need to acquire more grant determination opportunities in one support state. In this respect, in this feature, in the second gaming state, a specific state in which the variable acceptance control is performed a plurality of times occurs, and such a specific state is configured as in the above feature D1. As a result, the configuration can be configured to meet the needs of the player, and the attractiveness of the specific state can be effectively enhanced.

Feature D3. In the specific state, the variable control means has a variable control period (a first opening period and a first waiting period) from the start of the variable acceptance control to the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control. Equipped with a variable control period setting means to set the sum
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game time operation (variation display time of the game time of the second special figure).
The operation period setting means is provided with means capable of setting a period shorter than the variable control period set by the variable control period setting means as the operation period of the ball-entry-corresponding game times. Characteristic The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entry portion in the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, it is possible to execute the later variable acceptance control after the end of the ball entry corresponding game round.

Feature D4. The operation period setting means is shorter than the variable control period set by the variable control period setting means as the operation period of the ball-entry-corresponding game times, and the variable acceptance control is started. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a means capable of setting a period longer than the period from the intermediate timing after the pachinko machine to the start of the variable pachinko / pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, if a game ball enters the ball entry section between the start of the previous variable acceptance control and the above intermediate timing, the ball entry corresponding game times end before the start of the later variable acceptance control. On the other hand, if the ball is entered after the above-mentioned intermediate timing, it becomes difficult to end the game round before the start of the variable acceptance control later. That is, the susceptibility of the vacant area before the start of the variable acceptance control after that differs depending on the ball entry timing. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to enter the ball at an early stage of variable acceptance control is added, and the interest of a specific state is improved.

Feature D5. The game rotation control means
A selection means for selecting one from a plurality of predetermined game circulation periods, and
A game rotation period setting means for setting the game rotation period selected by the selection means as an operation period (variable display time) of the game rotation operation, and
With
The plurality of game circulation periods include a first game circulation period and a second game circulation period longer than the first game circulation period.
The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, wherein the first gaming period is shorter than the variable control period, and the second gaming period is longer than the variable control period. ..

According to the above configuration, whether or not the game round ends before the start of the later variable acceptance control differs depending on the selection result of the selection means. Compared to the case where the game round ends before the start of the variable acceptance control after all, the monotonization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the selection probability of the first gaming period is higher than the selection probability of the second gaming period.

According to the above configuration, it becomes easy for the player to experience the game in which the game round ends before the start of the variable acceptance control later. As a result, it becomes easier to receive a profit when a specific state occurs, and it becomes possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of the specific state.

Feature D7. The game time control means includes an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game time operation (variation display time of the game time of the second special figure).
When the storage number of the special information of the information storage means is the first storage number, the operation period setting means sets the first period as the operation period, and the storage number of the special information of the information storage means is the said. A means for setting a second period different from the first period as the operation period when the second memory number is different from the first memory number is provided.
When the second period is set as the operation period of the ball-entry-corresponding game round, the variable acceptance control after the end of the ball-entry-corresponding game round can be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the game round ends before the start of the later variable acceptance control differs depending on the number of stored special information of the information storage means, and the number of stored special information is the second stored number. If this is the case, the game round is likely to end before the subsequent variable acceptance control is executed. As a result, when the specific state is started, the fun of aiming to enter the ball entry portion so that the number of stored special information becomes the second stored number is added, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

Feature D8. The variable control means means to make the execution period (opening period) of the first state of the variable acceptance control earlier than the execution period of the first state of the variable acceptance control later in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the above configuration, it becomes easy to increase the number of stored special information by the above variable acceptance control. As a result, the former variable acceptance control can be used as an opportunity to store the number of stored special information, and the later variable acceptance control can be used as an opportunity to replenish the consumption up to that point. In this case, since the player can acquire a certain number of memories by the above variable acceptance control, the player can enjoy a certain degree of profit by executing the above variable acceptance control. As a result, as a result of obtaining a certain degree of satisfaction, it becomes easy to have a psychological margin to enjoy whether or not the consumption can be replenished by the later variable acceptance control, and the playability in a specific state is improved.

Feature D9. The variable control means according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that the variable control means includes means for maximizing the execution period of the first state of the variable acceptance control that is first performed in the specific state. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it becomes easy to increase the number of stored special information in the first variable acceptance control. In this case, since the player can acquire a certain number of memories by the first variable acceptance control, he / she can enjoy a certain degree of profit at the initial stage of the specific state. As a result, as a result of obtaining a certain degree of satisfaction, it becomes easy to have a psychological margin to enjoy whether or not the consumption can be replenished by the subsequent variable acceptance control, and the playability in a specific state is improved.

Feature D10. The variable control means sets a control period (first standby period) for setting a control period (first standby period) from the end of the previous variable acceptance control to the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control in the specific state. Equipped with means
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game time operation (variation display time of the game time of the second special figure).
The operation period setting means is characterized by including means capable of setting a period shorter than the control period set by the control period setting means as the operation period of the ball-entry-corresponding game times. Features The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D9.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entry section during the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, if the ball entry corresponding game times are started before the end of the previous variable acceptance control, the game is concerned. It is possible to reliably end the times before the start of the later variable acceptance control.

Feature D11. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein the later variable acceptance control is the variable acceptance control performed next to the earlier variable acceptance control.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entry portion in the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, it is possible to end the ball entry corresponding game times before the start of the next variable acceptance control. .. This makes it possible for the player to efficiently obtain an opportunity for a grant determination in a specific state.

Feature D12. The first ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) as the ball entry portion and
A first information storage means (holding area Rb for the second result display unit) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as the first information, and
A second ball entry section (lower operating port 305) provided in the game area and different from the first ball entry section on which a game ball can enter,
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81) to acquire the second information based on the entry of the game ball into the two entry portions.
A second information storage means (holding area Ra for the first result display unit) that stores the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and
A second grant determination means (main control device 81) that performs a second grant determination process of whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to the grant information or grant information different from the grant information. (A function to execute the hit / fail judgment process for the lower operating port 305) and
In a situation where the first information is stored in the first information storage means and the second information is stored in the second information storage means, the second grant determination is prioritized over the grant determination. (A function to execute the winning process by the main control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11.

In the above configuration, in the configuration including the grant determination process for the first ball entry portion and the grant determination process for the second ball entry portion, the former is preferentially performed. As a result, when a game ball enters the first ball entry portion, the game times corresponding to the entry ball can be easily performed, and each effect in each configuration described in any of the above features D1 to D11. Is easier to obtain.

Feature D13. As the end condition of the specific state, the first condition in which the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion is a predetermined upper limit, and the variable acceptance control of the predetermined upper limit execution number is completed. 2 conditions and are set,
The specific state is controlled so as to be terminated when at least one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, wherein the upper limit number is set to a number equal to or greater than the upper limit number of executions.

For example, in a configuration in which the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit execution number, when one game ball enters the entry portion for one variable acceptance control in a specific state, the number of executions of the variable acceptance control The specific state ends before the maximum number of executions is reached, and there is a risk that the specific state cannot be enjoyed to the end. In this respect, according to this feature, since the upper limit number is set to the number equal to or more than the upper limit number of executions, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably solved.

Feature D14. The launching means can launch a game ball at a predetermined firing cycle.
The information storage means can store special information up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
The variable acceptance control is performed so that the variable acceptance means is changed from the first state to the second state when the execution period of the first state reaches a predetermined upper limit period.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D13, wherein the upper limit period is a period equal to or less than the product of the added value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the firing means.

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid entry into the entry portion when viewed in relation to the grant determination.

In the above feature D14, "the product of the added value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the launching means" is "more than or equal to the firing cycle of the launching means and the addition of 1 added to the predetermined number". It may be "less than or equal to the product of the value and the firing cycle of the firing means". Further, the "period less than or equal to the product of the added value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the firing means" may be set to "3 sec or less", and further, "0.6 sec or more and 3.0 sec or less". May be.

Feature D15. A ball entry part (upper operating port 303) where a game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Based on the special information stored in the information storage means, a control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the game effect to be performed by a predetermined effect means, and
A variable receiving means that can be switched between a first state in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. (Electric accessory 307) and
A variable control means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state.
Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined transition conditions, the state transition means (shift to the normal game state by the main control device 81) for shifting to the specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed a plurality of times. Function to execute processing) and
With
In the plurality of variable acceptance controls executed in the specific state, when a game ball enters the entry portion in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, the game effect corresponding to the entry A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the variable acceptance control after the end of the above.

According to the above configuration, special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section, and the special information is stored in the information storage means. Then, the game production is performed based on the special information stored in the information storage means. In this configuration, the number of special information stored in the information storage means decreases as the game effect is executed, and the free area in which new special information can be stored increases accordingly. On the premise of such a configuration, in this feature, in a plurality of variable acceptance controls executed in a specific state, when a game ball enters the entry portion in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, the entry is made. It is configured so that the variable acceptance control after the end of the game effect corresponding to the above can be executed.

For example, if a game ball enters the ball entry section by executing the variable acceptance control, the game effect corresponding to the ball entry continues until the end of the specific state. From the start to the end of the specific state, no new free space is generated by the information storage means. Therefore, it is assumed that the player's interest in entering the ball into the ball entry portion is diminished after the number of stored information storage means reaches the upper limit during the transition to the specific state. Furthermore, since no new free space is created in the information storage means, at most, there are at most opportunities to execute the game effect for the total number of times the game effect is executed based on the first ball entry and the maximum number of stored special information. There is also a concern that it can only be acquired.

In this regard, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the ball entry section during the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, a game effect corresponding to the entry is performed before the start of the later variable acceptance control. It becomes possible to finish and start the next game production. As a result, the later variable acceptance control can be started after increasing the free area of the information storage means, and there is a desire to enter the ball into the ball entry portion during the execution of the later variable acceptance control. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in entering the ball through the specific state. Further, it is possible to obtain an execution opportunity of the game production a number of times exceeding the total of the execution amount of the grant determination based on the first ball entry and the upper limit storage number of the special information. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to allow many game balls to enter the entry section during the specific state is enhanced, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (the pass / fail determination process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) that performs grant determination processing as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information. Function to execute) and
A first state provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched, and
A variable control means (a function of executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition.
Execution of processing during the support state by the notification control means (effect control device 82) that controls so that the specific notification (special display effect) corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control is performed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Function) and equipped with
The notification control means
A grasping means for grasping the storage status of special information in the information storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2501 to S2503 and S2504 to S2508 by the effect control device 82) and
It is characterized in that it includes a changing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2504, S2508, S2509 by the effect control device 82) for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasping result of the grasping means. Amusement machine.

In the above configuration, special information is stored in the information storage means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the grant determination is performed using the special information stored in the information storage means. Is performed within the range in which special information can be stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the game ball is inserted into the ball entry portion beyond the memorable range of the information storage means, the ball entry does not lead to the grant determination. Under such circumstances, in a configuration in which switching control of the variable receiving means is performed, the variable receiving means is switched to the first state and the information storage means is special in order to efficiently enter the ball into the ball entry portion. When the information can be stored, it is desirable to enter the ball into the ball entry section, and in other cases, refrain from entering the ball. However, if the player decides to make such a distinction, the player must always pay attention not only to the status of the variable receiving means but also to the storage status of the information storage means, which distracts the attention. It tends to be.

In this respect, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means is performed, and the execution mode of the specific notification can be changed according to the storage status of the information storage means. That is, in the specific notification, a correlation is generated with respect to both the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means and the storage state of the information storage means. Therefore, even if the player does not grasp the switching status of the variable receiving means and the storage status of the information storage means, if the player proceeds with the game with reference to the specific notification, the game based on those situations will be natural. Can be done with. As a result, distraction is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the concentration on the game. In addition, the degree of attention to the specific notification can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Feature E2. The information storage means is configured to be capable of storing special information up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
The grasping means includes a storage number grasping means for grasping the number of stored special information in the information storing means or the remaining storable number up to the predetermined number.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the changing means includes means for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasping result of the storage number grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification can be correlated with the number of stored special information or the remaining storable up to a predetermined number, and the game is performed based on the switching status of the variable receiving means and the number of stored special information. be able to.

Feature E3. The changing means includes means for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on whether or not the number of stored special information grasped by the storage number grasping means reaches the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature E2.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the specific notification can be changed depending on whether or not the number of stored special information has reached the upper limit, and when the variable receiving means is switched and controlled, the special information is stored. You can play games that make the most of the possible number.

Feature E4. In the changing means, when the grasping result of the grasping means is the first situation, the specific notification is performed in the first aspect (first special display effect S1), and the grasping result of the grasping means is the first situation. In the case of a second situation different from the above, the specific notification is performed in a second mode (second special display effect S2) different from the first mode, or a means for preventing the specific notification from being performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3.

According to the above configuration, the mode of the specific notification and the presence / absence of the specific notification can be switched according to the transition between the switching status of the variable receiving means and the storage status of the information storage means, and the specific notification suitable for each situation is performed. Will be possible.

Feature E5. The first aspect includes notification of an aspect that suggests that the variable receiving means switches from the second state to the first state, or urges the player to aim at the variable receiving means. The gaming machine according to the feature E4.

According to the above configuration, each situation of the variable receiving means and the information storage means can be determined by the first aspect being a suggestion of switching the variable receiving means to the first state and a notification of a mode prompting the variable receiving means to aim. Based on this, it is possible to assist the player in the game progress.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the first aspect includes notification according to the remaining storable number of special information of the information storage means.

According to the above configuration, the remaining memorable number can be notified by the specific notification, and even if the player concentrates on the specific notification, the game can be advanced while grasping the remaining memorable number.

Feature E7. The launching operation means (launching handle 54) in which the player performs the predetermined launching operation is provided.
The launching means launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the first region (left region PE2) in the game region when the launch operation is performed on the launch operation means with the first operation amount. Then, when the launch operation is performed with the second operation amount for the launch operation means, the game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down the second region (right region PE3) in the game region. can be,
The variable receiving means is configured so that when the second state is switched to the first state, a game ball flowing down the second region can be accepted or easily accepted by the receiving portion.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E6, wherein the first aspect is a notification (right-handed notification) of an aspect suggesting that the second region should flow down.

According to the above configuration, the launching operation of the player can be assisted by the specific notification, and it becomes easy to perform the game suitable for each situation of the variable receiving means and the information storage means.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7, wherein the second aspect includes notification of an aspect of urging the player to wait for a game or stop firing a game ball.

According to the above configuration, the second aspect is the notification of the aspect of urging the game standby and the launch stop of the game ball, thereby assisting the player's game progress while taking into account the situations of the variable receiving means and the information storage means. Can be done.

Feature E9. The notification control means controls so that the specific notification is performed at a predetermined timing before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the grasping means includes means for grasping a storage state of special information of the information storage means at a predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance and launch the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means. It will be possible to do it at the right time. Further, since the storage status of the information storage means at the execution timing of the specific notification is grasped, the specific notification that reflects the latest storage status can be performed, and the reliability and the degree of interest in the specific notification can be increased. ..

Feature E10. The variable control means
A variable control means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state.
Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined transition condition, the state transition means (main control device 81 shifts to the normal game state transition process) for transitioning to the specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once. Function to execute) and
With
The notification control means is characterized by including means for controlling so that the specific notification is performed in the waiting period (opening period, first waiting period, second waiting period) immediately before the variable acceptance control. Features The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E9.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed by using the waiting period in the specific state. As a result, the specific notification can be utilized as one effect in the specific state, and the interest of the specific state can be improved. Further, since the specific notification is performed in the waiting period immediately before the variable acceptance control, the specific notification can be performed according to the execution mode of the latest variable acceptance control, and the playability is improved.

Feature E11. The notification control means controls so that the specific notification is performed at a predetermined timing before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.
The grasping means is a change grasping means (step by the effect control device 82) for grasping a change in the storage state that occurs from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, which comprises a function of executing the processing of S2505 to S2508).

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance and launch the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means. It will be possible to do it at the right time. Further, in order to grasp the change in the storage state that occurs from the second state to the first state and then to the second state after the predetermined timing, the switching control is not limited to the execution timing of the specific notification. It is possible to perform specific notification that takes into account changes in the storage status until the end of.

In the feature E11, "the variable receiving means occurs from the second state to the first state and then to the second state" "from the predetermined timing, the variable receiving means is the first state. It may be read as "occurs between the two states, the first state, and then the second state."

Feature E12. The changing means
When the grasping result of the change grasping means is the first specific situation, the specific notification is performed in the first aspect, and the grasping result of the change grasping means is a second specific situation different from the first specific situation. In this case, the specific notification is performed in a second aspect (second special display effect S2) different from the first aspect, or means for preventing the specific notification from being performed (step S2505 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that it includes a function of executing the process of ~ S2509).

According to the above configuration, the mode of the specific notification and the presence / absence of the specific notification can be switched according to the change in the storage status until the switching control is completed, and the specific notification suitable for each situation can be performed. ..

Feature E13. The change grasping means is characterized in that the information storage means includes means for grasping a decrease in the number of stored special information that occurs before the variable receiving means is brought into the second state. The gaming machine described in E12.

According to the above configuration, even if there is no margin in the storage status of the special information at the time of executing the specific notification, if there is a margin before the switching control is completed, the notification can be performed based on the margin. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably assist the efficient entry of the ball into the entry portion, and the interest is improved.

Feature E14. One of the game times is that the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the game rotation operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a time, a game time control means (a function of executing a game time control process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for controlling the game time operation of each game time is provided.
The change grasping means
Remaining period grasping means (function of executing the process of step S2507 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the remaining period of the game times executed at the predetermined timing, and
Based on the remaining period grasped by the remaining period grasping means, a start determination means for determining whether or not the next game round is started by the time the variable receiving means is brought into the second state ( The function of executing the process of step S2508 by the effect control device 82) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature E13, characterized in that the decrease in the number of stored memory is grasped based on the determination result of the start determination means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably grasp the decrease in the number of stored special information that occurs between the second state, the first state, and then the second state of the variable receiving means.

Feature E15. The first game operation is that the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the game rotation operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. The first game time control means (a function of the main control device 81 to execute the game time control process for the upper operating port 303) that controls the operation of each first game time so as to perform the game time operation. When,
A second ball entry portion (lower operating port 305) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81) to acquire the second special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion.
A second grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process for the lower operating port 305 by the main control device 81) that makes a second grant determination based on the second special information acquired by the second information acquisition means.
The second is that the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the game rotation operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the second grant determination. As one of the game times, the second game time control means (main control device 81 executes the game time control process for the lower operating port 305) that controls the operation of each second game time so as to perform the game time operation. Function) and
With
The change grasping means
An execution status grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S2505 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the execution status of the second game at the predetermined timing, and
When the second game is executed at the predetermined timing, the remaining period grasping means for grasping the remaining period of the second game (a function of executing the process of step S2506 by the effect control device 82) and
A start determination means for determining whether or not the first game round is started by the time the variable acceptance means is brought into the second state based on the remaining period grasped by the remaining period grasping means ( The function of executing the process of step S2508 by the effect control device 82) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature E13 or E14, characterized in that the decrease in the number of stored memory is grasped based on the determination result of the start determination means.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of ball entry sections of a ball entry section and a second ball entry section, and in which grant determination and game times are performed separately in response to entry into each ball entry section. It becomes possible to preferably grasp the decrease in the number of stored special information that occurs between the second state and the second state after the variable receiving means is changed to the second state.

Feature E16. A second information storage means (holding area Ra for the first result display unit) that stores the second special information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and
In a situation where special information is stored in the information storage means and the second special information is stored in the second information storage means, control is performed so that the second grant determination is prioritized over the grant determination. Priority means (function to execute winning process by the main controller 81) and
The gaming machine according to the feature E15.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration including a grant determination process for the first ball entry section and a grant determination process for the second ball entry section, when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, the said Whether or not the first game round is started by the time the variable acceptance means is put into the second state based on the remaining period of the second game round because the game round corresponding to the ball entry is easily performed. Can be judged properly.

Feature E17. The notification control means controls so that the specific notification is performed at a predetermined timing before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.
The grasping means
A first grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2501 to S2503 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the storage status of the special information of the information storage means at the predetermined timing, and
When the grasping result of the first grasping means is a specific situation, the change in the storage state that occurs from the second state to the first state and then to the second state is grasped. Second grasping means (function of executing the process of steps S2505 to S2508 by the effect control device 82) and
With
The changing means executes the processes of steps S2504, S2508, and S2509 by the effect control device 82 to change the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasping results of the first grasping means and the second grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E16, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance, and can launch the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means at an appropriate timing. Further, it is possible to perform the specific notification in consideration of not only the execution timing of the specific notification but also the change in the storage status until the switching control is completed.

Feature E18. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 303) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (the pass / fail determination process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) that performs grant determination processing as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information. Function to execute) and
A first state provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched, and
A variable control means (a function of executing the normal game state transition process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, and
Execution of processing during the support state by the notification control means (effect control device 82) that controls so that the specific notification (special display effect) corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control is performed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Function) and equipped with
The notification control means
A grasping means for grasping the storage status of special information in the information storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2501 to S2503 and S2504 to S2508 by the effect control device 82) and
When the grasping result of the grasping means is the first situation, the specific notification is performed in the first aspect (first special display effect S1), and the grasping result of the grasping means is different from the first situation. In the case of a situation, the specific notification is performed in a second aspect (second special display effect S2) different from the first aspect, or the specific notification means (effect) for preventing the specific notification from being performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processing of steps S2504, S2508, and S2509 by the control device 82).

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above features E1 or E4 is expected. It is possible to apply each of the configurations described in any of the above features E2 to E16 to this feature, and in this case, the "changing means" in each configuration can be read as "specific notification means". ..

The technical ideas shown in the inventions of the features A to E described above may be applied to the inventions of the features A to E, and some or all of them may be combined to form the features A to E. It may be applied to each invention of group E. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to E.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means (launching handle 54) operated by a player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launched game ball. A ball passage (rail portions 51, 52) leading to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part arranged in the game area are provided, and a predetermined passing part (general prize) among the game parts is provided. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a mouth 31 or the like.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol sequence in the final stop. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

24 ... Game board, 53 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 232 ... Holding ball storage area, 303 ... Upper operating port, 305 ... Lower operating port, 307 ... Electric accessory, 311 ... First light emitting unit, 317 ... Second light emitting unit , 331 ... Opening / closing member, 365 ... 1st guide, 371 ... 2nd guide, 403 ... 2nd guide, 411 ... Notch, 451 ... 2nd guide, 453 ... Confrontation, 503 ... 2nd guide Section 511 ... Opening / closing member, 517 ... Through hole, 603 ... First guide section, R1 ... First flow path, R2 ... Second flow path, R3 ... Third flow path, RA ... Accepting area.

The present invention
A firing means capable fired Yu technique sphere based on a predetermined firing operation,
An entry part where a game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a ball entry portion.
A first state in which the ball of a game ball is allowed or easily allowed to enter the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion is restricted or less tolerated than in the first state. And, a variable means that can be switched to,
With
It is configured so that switching control for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined switching condition and then changing to the second state can be executed.
A first guiding means capable of guiding the game ball on the upstream side to the downstream side on the upstream side of the ball entry portion,
A second guiding means capable of guiding the game ball guided by the first guiding means in the variable means to the downstream side in the situation where the variable means is in the second state.
With
The distance between the first guiding means and the second guiding means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball in the guiding direction of the game ball by the first guiding means .

Claims (1)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into the gaming area based on a predetermined launch operation,
An entry portion provided in the game area where a game ball can enter, and a ball entry portion.
A first state provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted in the ball entry portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. Variable receiving means that can be switched,
A variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition.
With
The variable receiving means is configured so that the game ball can flow down in front of the variable receiving means when it is in the second state.
A gaming machine comprising a defining means capable of defining a flow direction of a gaming ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state.

Images